Advantys STB

31007720 08/2016

Advantys STB
Digital I/O Modules
Reference Guide
08/2016
31007720.05

www.schneider-electric.com
 The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you
have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication,
please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and
using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system
data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant
instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may
result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2016 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

2 31007720 08/2016
 Table of Contents

Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 1 The Advantys STB Architecture: Theory of Operation . . 15
Advantys STB Islands of Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Types of Modules on an Advantys STB Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Island Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Logic Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Sensor Power and Actuator Power Distribution on the Island Bus . . . 30
Communications Across the Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 2 The Advantys STB Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1 STB DDI 3230 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (two-channel, four-
wire, IEC type 2, 0.2 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected) . . . . . . 40
STB DDI 3230 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
STB DDI 3230 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
STB DDI 3230 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
STB DDI 3230 Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
STB DDI 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . 50
STB DDI 3230 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2 STB DDI 3420 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-
wire, IEC type 3, 0.5 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected) . . . . . . 53
STB DDI 3420 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
STB DDI 3420 LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
STB DDI 3420 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
STB DDI 3420 Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
STB DDI 3420 Data and Status for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . 63
STB DDI 3420 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3 STB DDI 3425 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-
wire, IEC type 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
STB DDI 3425 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
STB DDI 3425 LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
STB DDI 3425 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
STB DDI 3425 Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
STB DDI 3425 Data for the Process Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
STB DDI 3425 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
31007720 08/2016 3
 2.4 STB DDI 3610 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-
wire, IEC type 1, fixed 1 ms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
STB DDI 3610 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
STB DDI 3610 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
STB DDI 3610 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
STB DDI 3610 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
STB DDI 3610 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
STB DDI 3610 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.5 STB DDI 3615 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-
wire, IEC type 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
STB DDI 3615 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
STB DDI 3615 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
STB DDI 3615 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
STB DDI 3615 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
STB DDI 3615 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
STB DDI 3615 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.6 STB DDI 3725 High Density Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
STB DDI 3725 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
STB DDI 3725 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
STB DDI 3725 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
STB DDI 3725 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
STB DDI 3725 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
STB DDI 3725 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.7 STB DAI 5230 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire,
IEC type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
STB DAI 5230 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
STB DAI 5230 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
STB DAI 5230 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
STB DAI 5230 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
STB DAI 5230 Data and Status for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
STB DAI 5230 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2.8 STB DAI 5260 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, isolated,
IEC type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
STB DAI 5260 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
STB DAI 5260 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
STB DAI 5260 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
STB DAI 5260 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
STB DAI 5260 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
STB DAI 5260 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

4 31007720 08/2016
 2.9 STB DAI 7220 Digital 230 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire,
IEC type 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
STB DAI 7220 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
STB DAI 7220 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
STB DAI 7220 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
STB DAI 7220 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
STB DAI 7220 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
STB DAI 7220 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Chapter 3 The Advantys STB Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.1 STB DDO 3200 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel,
0.5 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
STB DDO 3200 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
STB DDO 3200 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
STB DDO 3200 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
STB DDO 3200 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
STB DDO 3200 Data and Status for the Process Image. . . . . . . . . . . 161
STB DDO 3200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.2 STB DDO 3230 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel,
2.0 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
STB DDO 3230 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
STB DDO 3230 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
STB DDO 3230 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
STB DDO 3230 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
STB DDO 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image. . . . . . . . . . . 179
STB DDO 3230 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.3 STB DDO 3410 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel,
0.5 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
STB DDO 3410 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
STB DDO 3410 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
STB DDO 3410 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
STB DDO 3410 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
STB DDO 3410 Data and Status for the Process Image. . . . . . . . . . . 196
STB DDO 3410 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

31007720 08/2016 5
 3.4 STB DDO 3415 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel,
0.25 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
STB DDO 3415 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
STB DDO 3415 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
STB DDO 3415 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
STB DDO 3415 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
STB DDO 3415 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
STB DDO 3415 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
3.5 STB DDO 3600 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel,
0.5 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
STB DDO 3600 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
STB DDO 3600 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
STB DDO 3600 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
STB DDO 3600 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
STB DDO 3600 Data and Status for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . 224
STB DDO 3600 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
3.6 STB DDO 3605 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel,
0.25 A, over-current protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
STB DDO 3605 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
STB DDO 3605 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
STB DDO 3605 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
STB DDO 3605 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
STB DDO 3605 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
STB DDO 3605 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
3.7 STB DDO 3705 High Density Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
STB DDO 3705 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
STB DDO 3705 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
STB DDO 3705 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
STB DDO 3705 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
STB DDO 3705 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
STB DDO 3705 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3.8 STB DAO 5260 Digital 115 VAC Source, Isolated Output Module (two-
channel, 2 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
STB DAO 5260 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
STB DAO 5260 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
STB DAO 5260 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
STB DAO 5260 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
STB DAO 5260 Data and Status for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . 264
STB DAO 5260 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

6 31007720 08/2016
 3.9 STB DAO 8210 Digital 115/230 VAC Source Output Module (two-
channel, 2 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
STB DAO 8210 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
STB DAO 8210 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
STB DAO 8210 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
STB DAO 8210 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
STB DAO 8210 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
STB DAO 8210 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Chapter 4 The Advantys STB Relay Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.1 STB DRC 3210 Relay Output Module (two-point, form C, 2 A, 24 V
coil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
STB DRC 3210 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
STB DRC 3210 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
STB DRC 3210 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
STB DRC 3210 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
STB DRC 3210 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
STB DRC 3210 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.2 STB DRA 3290 Relay Output Module (two-point, form A/B,
7 A/contact, 24 V coil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
STB DRA 3290 Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
STB DRA 3290 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
STB DRA 3290 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
STB DRA 3290 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
STB DRA 3290 Data for the Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
STB DRA 3290 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 5 Advantys Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5.1 STB PDT 2100 Standard 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module . . 320
STB PDT 2100 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
STB PDT 2100 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
STB PDT 2100 Source Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
STB PDT 2100 Field Power Over-current Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Protective Earth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
STB PDT 2100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
5.2 STB PDT 2105 Basic 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module . . . . . 332
STB PDT 2105 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
STB PDT 2105 Source Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
STB PDT 2105 Protective Earth Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
STB PDT 2105 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

31007720 08/2016 7
 5.3 STB PDT 3100 24 VDC Power Distribution Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
STB PDT 3100 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
STB PDT 3100 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
STB PDT 3100 Source Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
STB PDT 3100 Field Power Over-current Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
The Protective Earth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
STB PDT 3100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.4 STB PDT 3105 24 VDC Basic Power Distribution Module. . . . . . . . . . 354
STB PDT 3105 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
STB PDT 3105 Source Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
STB PDT 3105 Field Power Over-current Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
STB PDT 3105 Protective Earth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
STB PDT 3105 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Chapter 6 STB Module Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Advantys Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
STB XBA 1000 I/O Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
STB XBA 2000 I/O Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
STB XBA 3000 I/O Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
STB XBA 2200 PDM Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
The Protective Earth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Appendix A IEC Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
IEC Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Appendix B STB HIgh Density I/O Telefast Connector Interfaces . . . . 389
High-density Telefast I/O Connector Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

8 31007720 08/2016
 Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device
before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention
to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

31007720 08/2016 9
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation
of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.

10 31007720 08/2016
 About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope
This document describes the physical and functional characteristics of the Advantys STB digital
I/O modules, power distribution modules, and digital module accessories.

Validity Note
This document is valid for Advantys 4.5 or later.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in this document also appear online. To
access this information online:

Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
 Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
 To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).

3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the
reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click
on the product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that
interests you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the data sheet.
6 To save or print a data sheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.

The characteristics that are presented in this manual should be the same as those characteristics
that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time
to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the manual and online information,
use the online information as your reference.

31007720 08/2016 11
Related Documents

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Advantys STB Analog I/O Modules Reference Guide 31007715 (English),
31007716 (French),
31007717 (German),
31007718 (Spanish),
31007719 (Italian)
Advantys STB Counter Modules Reference Guide 31007725 (English),
31007726 (French),
31007727 (German),
31007728 (Spanish),
31007729 (Italian)
Advantys STB Special Modules Reference Guide 31007730 (English),
31007731 (French),
31007732 (German),
31007733 (Spanish),
31007734 (Italian)
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide 31002947 (English),
31002948 (French),
31002949 (German),
31002950 (Spanish),
31002951 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard Profibus DP Network Interface Applications 31002957 (English),
Guide 31002958 (French),
31002959 (German),
31002960 (Spanish),
31002961 (Italian)
Advantys STB Basic Profibus DP Network Interface Applications 31005773 (English),
Guide 31005774 (French),
31005775 (German),
31005776 (Spanish),
31005777 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard INTERBUS Network Interface Applications 31004624 (English),
Guide 31004625 (French),
31004626 (German),
31004627 (Spanish),
31004628 (Italian)
Advantys STB Basic INTERBUS Network Interface Applications 31005789 (English),
Guide 31005790 (French),
31005791 (German),
31005792 (Spanish),
31005793 (Italian)

12 31007720 08/2016
 Title of Documentation Reference Number
Advantys STB Standard DeviceNet Network Interface Applications 31003680 (English),
Guide 31003681 (French),
31003682 (German),
31003683 (Spanish),
31004619 (Italian)
Advantys STB Basic DeviceNet Network Interface Applications 31005784 (English),
Guide 31005785 (French),
31005786 (German),
31005787 (Spanish),
31005788 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard CANopen Network Interface Applications 31003684 (English),
Guide 31003685 (French),
31003686 (German),
31003687 (Spanish),
31004621 (Italian)
Advantys STB Basic CANopen Network Interface Applications Guide 31005779 (English),
31005780 (French),
31005781 (German),
31005782 (Spanish),
31005783 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard CANopen Devices 31006709 (English),
31006710 (French),
31006711 (German),
31006712 (Spanish),
31006713 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP Network Interface 31003688 (English),
Applications Guide 31003689 (French),
31003690 (German),
31003691 (Spanish),
31004622 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard Modbus Plus Network Interface Applications 31004629 (English),
Guide 31004630 (French),
31004631 (German),
31004632 (Spanish),
31004633 (Italian)
Advantys STB Standard Fipio Network Interface Applications Guide 31003692 (English),
31003693 (French),
31003694 (German),
31003695 (Spanish),
31004623 (Italian)

31007720 08/2016 13
 Title of Documentation Reference Number
Advantys STB Configuration Software Quick Start User Guide 31002962 (English),
31002963 (French),
31002964 (German),
31002965 (Spanish),
31002966 (Italian)
Advantys STB Reflex Actions Reference Guide 31004635 (English),
31004636 (French),
31004637 (German),
31004638 (Spanish),
31004639 (Italian)

You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website
at http://download.schneider-electric.com

14 31007720 08/2016
 Advantys STB
Theory of Operation
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 1
The Advantys STB Architecture: Theory of Operation

The Advantys STB Architecture: Theory of Operation

Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the Advantys STB system. It provides you with context for
understanding the functional capabilities of an island and how its various hardware components
interoperate with one other.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Advantys STB Islands of Automation 16
Types of Modules on an Advantys STB Island 18
Island Segments 20
Logic Power Flow 24
The Power Distribution Modules 26
Sensor Power and Actuator Power Distribution on the Island Bus 30
Communications Across the Island 34
Operating Environment 37

31007720 08/2016 15
Theory of Operation

Advantys STB Islands of Automation

System Definition
Advantys STB is an open, modular distributed I/O system designed for the machine industry, with
a migration path to the process industry. Modular I/O, power distribution modules (PDMs) and a
network interface module (NIM) reside in a structure called an island. The island functions as a
node on a fieldbus control network and is managed by an upstream fieldbus master controller.

Open Fieldbus Choices

An island of Advantys STB modules can function on a variety of different open industry-standard
fieldbus networks. Among these are:
 Profibus DP
 DeviceNet
 Ethernet
 CANopen
 Fipio
 Modbus Plus
 INTERBUS
A NIM resides in the first position on the island bus (leftmost on the physical setup). It acts as the
gateway between the island and the fieldbus, facilitating data exchange between the fieldbus
master and the I/O modules on the island. It is the only module on the island that is fieldbus-
dependent—a different type of NIM module is available for each fieldbus. The rest of the I/O and
power distribution modules on the island bus function exactly the same, regardless of the fieldbus
on which the island resides. You have the advantage of being able to select the I/O modules to
build an island independent of the fieldbus on which it will operate.

Granularity
Advantys STB I/O modules are designed to be small, economical devices that provide you with just
enough input and output channels to satisfy your application needs. Specific types of I/O modules
are available with two or more channels. You can select exactly the amount of I/O you need and
you do not have to pay for channels that you don’t need.

Mechatronics
An Advantys STB system lets you place the control electronics in the I/O modules as close as
possible to the mechanical devices they are controlling. This concept is known as mechatronics.
Depending on the type of NIM you use, an Advantys STB island bus may be extended to multiple
segments of I/O on one or more DIN rails. Island bus extensions allow you to position the I/O as
close as possible to the sensors and actuators they control. Using special extension cables and
modules, an island bus may be stretched to distances up to 15 m (49.21 ft).

16 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

Environmental Considerations
This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges and is ATEX certified
for operation in hazardous environments. Refer to the Advantys STB System Installation and
Planning Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete summary of capabilities and limitations.

31007720 08/2016 17
Theory of Operation

Types of Modules on an Advantys STB Island

Summary
Your island’s performance is determined by the type of NIM that you use. NIMs for various field
buses are available in different model numbers at different price points and with scalable operating
capabilities. Standard NIMs, for example, can support up to 32 I/O modules in multiple (extension)
segments. Low-cost basic NIMs, on the other hand, are limited to 16 I/O modules in a single
segment.
If you are using a basic NIM, you may use only Advantys STB I/O modules on the island bus. With
a standard NIM, you may use:
 Advantys STB I/O modules
 optional preferred modules
 optional standard CANopen devices

Advantys STB Modules

The core set of Advantys STB modules comprises:
 a set of analog, digital and special I/O modules
 open fieldbus NIMs
 power distribution modules (PDMs)
 island bus extension modules
 special modules
These core modules are designed to specific Advantys STB form factors and fit on base units on
the island bus. They take full advantage of the island’s communication and power distribution
capabilities, and they are auto-addressable.

18 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

Preferred Modules
A preferred module is a device from another Schneider catalog, or potentially from a third-party
developer, that fully complies with the Advantys STB island bus protocol. Preferred modules are
developed and qualified under agreement with Schneider; they conform fully to Advantys STB
standards and are auto-addressable.
For the most part, the island bus handles a preferred module as it does standard Advantys STB
I/O module, with four key differences:
 A preferred module is not designed in the standard form factor of an Advantys STB module and
does not fit into one of the standard base units. It therefore does not reside in an Advantys STB
segment.
 A preferred module requires its own power supply. It does not get logic power from the island
bus.
 To place preferred modules in your island, use the Advantys configuration software.
 You cannot use preferred modules with a basic NIM.
Preferred modules can be placed between segments of STB I/O or at the end of the island. If a
preferred module is the last module on the island bus, it should be terminated with a 120 Ω
terminator resistor.

Standard CANopen Devices

An Advantys STB island can support standard off-the-shelf CANopen devices. These devices are
not auto-addressable on the island bus, and therefore they should be manually addressed, usually
with physical switches built into the devices. They are configured using the Advantys configuration
software. You cannot use a standard CANopen device with a basic NIM.
When standard CANopen devices are used, they should be installed at the end of the island. 120 Ω
termination should be provided both at the end of the last Advantys STB segment and at the last
standard CANopen device.

31007720 08/2016 19
Theory of Operation

Island Segments

Summary
An Advantys STB system starts with a group of interconnected devices called the primary
segment. This first segment is a mandatory piece of an island. Depending on your needs and on
the type of NIM you are using (see page 18), the island may optionally be expanded to additional
segments of Advantys STB modules, called extension segments and to non-STB devices such as
preferred modules and/or standard CANopen devices.

The Primary Segment

Every island bus begins with a primary segment. The primary segment consists of the island’s NIM
and a set of interconnected module bases attached to a DIN rail. The PDMs and Advantys STB I/O
module mount in these bases on the DIN rail. The NIM is always the first (leftmost) module in the
primary segment.

The Island Bus

The bases that you interconnect on the DIN rail form an island bus structure. The island bus houses
the modules and supports the communications buses across the island. A set of contacts on the
sides of the base units (see page 34) provides the bus structure for:
 logic power
 sensor field power to the input modules
 actuator power to the output modules
 the auto-addressing signal
 island bus communications between the I/O and the NIM
The NIM, unlike the PDMs and I/O modules, attaches directly to a DIN rail:

1 NIM
2 module bases
3 termination plate
4 DIN rail

20 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

The DIN Rail

The NIM and the module bases snap onto a conductive metal DIN rail. The rail may be 7.5 mm or
15 mm deep.

The NIM
A NIM performs several key functions:
 It is the master of the island bus, supporting the I/O modules by acting as their communications
interface across the island backplane
 It is the gateway between the island and the fieldbus on which the island operates, managing
data exchange between the island’s I/O modules and the fieldbus master
 It may be the interface to the Advantys configuration software; basic NIMs to not provide a
software interface
 It is the primary power supply for logic power on the island bus, delivering a 5 VDC logic power
signal to the I/O modules in the primary segment
Different NIM models are available to support the various open fieldbuses and different operational
requirements. Choose the NIM that meets your needs and operates on the appropriate fieldbus
protocol. Each NIM is documented in its own user manual.

PDMs
The second module on the primary segment is a PDM. PDMs are available in different models to
support:
 24 VDC field power to the I/O modules in a segment
 115 VAC or 230 VAC field power to the I/O modules in a segment
The number of different I/O voltage groups that are installed on the segment determine the number
of PDMs that need to be installed. If your segment contains I/O from all three voltage groups, you
will need to install at least three separate PDMs in the segment.
Different PDM models are available with scalable performance characteristics. A standard PDM,
for example, delivers actuator power to the output modules and sensor power to the input modules
in a segment over two separate power lines on the island bus. A basic PDM, on the other hand,
delivers actuator power and field power over a single power line.

31007720 08/2016 21
Theory of Operation

The Bases
There are six types of bases that can be used in a segment. Specific bases should be used with
specific module types, and it is important that you always install the correct bases in the
appropriate locations in each segment:

Base Model Base Width Advantys STB Modules It Supports

STB XBA 1000 13.9 mm (0.54 in) the size 1 base that supports 13.9 mm wide I/O modules (24 VDC digital
I/O and analog I/O)
STB XBA 2000 18.4 mm (0.72 in) the size 2 base that supports 18.4 mm I/O modules and the
STB XBE 2100 CANopen extension module (see Advantys STB,
Special Modules, Reference Guide)
STB XBA 2100 18.4 mm (0.72 in) the size 2 base that supports an auxiliary power supply
STB XBA 2200 18.4 mm (0.72 in) the size 2 base that supports the PDMs
STB XBA 2300 18.4 mm (0.72 in) the size 2 base that supports BOS modules
STB XBA 2400 18.4 mm (0.72 in) the size 2 base that supports EOS modules
STB XBA 3000 28.1 mm (1.06 in) the size 3 base that supports many of the special modules

As you plan and assemble the island bus, check that you choose and insert the correct base in
each location on the island bus.

I/O
Each segment contains a minimum of one Advantys STB I/O module. The maximum number of
modules in a segment is determined by their total current draw on the 5 VDC logic power supply
in the segment. A built-in power supply in the NIM provides 5 VDC to the I/O modules in the primary
segment. A similar power supply built into the BOS modules provides 5 VDC for the I/O modules
in any extension segments. Each of these supplies produce 1.2 A, and the sum of the logic power
current consumed by all the I/O modules in a segment cannot exceed 1.2 A.

The Last Device on the Primary Segment

The island bus should be terminated with a 120 Ω terminator resistor. If the last module on the
island bus is an Advantys STB I/O module, use an STB XMP 1100 terminator plate at the end of
the segment.
If the island bus is extended to another segment of Advantys STB modules or to a preferred
module (see page 19), you need to install an STB XBE 1000 EOS bus extension module in the last
position of the segment that will be extended. Do not apply 120 Ω termination to the EOS module.
The EOS module has an IEEE 1394-style output connector for a bus extension cable. The
extension cable carries the island’s communications bus and auto-addressing line to the extension
segment or to the preferred module.

22 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

If the island bus is extended to a standard CANopen device (see page 18), you need to install an
STB XBE 2100 CANopen extension module in the rightmost position of the segment and apply
120 Ω termination to island bus after the CANopen extension module—use the STB XMP 1100
terminator plate. You should also provide 120 Ω termination on the last CANopen device that is
installed on the island bus.
Remember that you cannot use extensions when a basic NIM is in the primary segment.

An Illustrative Example
The illustration below shows an example of a primary segment with PDMs and I/O modules
installed in their bases:

1 The NIM resides in the first location. One and only one NIM is used on an island.
2 A 115/230 VAC STB PDT 2100 PDM, installed directly to the right of the NIM. This module distributes AC
power over two separate field power buses, a sensor bus and an actuator bus.
3 A set of digital AC I/O modules installed in a voltage group directly to the right of the STB PDT 2100 PDM.
The input modules in this group receive field power from the island’s sensor bus, and the output modules
in this group receive AC field power from the island’s actuator bus.
4 A 24 VDC STB PDT 3100 PDM, which will distribute 24 VDC across the island’s sensor and actuator buses
to a voltage group of 24 VDC I/O modules. This PDM also provides isolation between the AC voltage group
to its left and the DC voltage group to its right.
5 A set of analog and digital I/O modules installed directly to the right of the STB PDT 3100 PDM.
6 An STB XBE 1000 EOS extension module installed in the last location in the segment. Its presence
indicates that the island bus will be extended beyond the primary segment and that you are not using a
basic NIM.

31007720 08/2016 23
Theory of Operation

Logic Power Flow

Summary
Logic power is the power that the Advantys STB I/O modules require to run their internal
processing and light their LEDs. It is distributed across an island segment by a 5-to-24 VDC power
supply. One of these power supplies is built into the NIM to support the primary segment; another
is built into the STB XBE 1200 BOS modules to support any extension segments. If you need to
provide more logic power in a primary or extension segment than the initial power supply can
deliver, you may also use an STB CPS 2111 auxiliary power supply (see Advantys STB, Special
Modules, Reference Guide).
These power supplies require an external SELV-rated 24 VDC power source, which is usually
mounted in the enclosure with the island.

Logic Power Flow

The NIM converts the incoming 24 VDC to 5 VDC, and sends it across the island bus to the I/O
modules in the primary segment:

This power supply provides 1.2 A of current to the primary segment. If the total current draw of all
the modules on the island bus exceeds 1.2 A, you need to either use an auxiliary power supply or
place some of the modules in one or more extension segment(s). If you use an extension segment,
an EOS module is needed at the end of the primary segment, followed by an extension cable to a
BOS module in an extension segment. The EOS terminates the 5 V logic power in the primary
segment. The BOS in the next segment has its own 24-to-5 VDC power supply. It requires its own
external 24 V power supply.

24 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

Here is an illustration of the extension segment scenario:

31007720 08/2016 25
Theory of Operation

The Power Distribution Modules

Functions
A PDM distributes field power to a set of Advantys STB I/O modules on the island bus. The PDM
sends field power to the input and output modules in a segment. Depending on the PDM module
you are using, it may distribute sensor power and actuator power on the same or on separate
power lines across the island bus. The PDM helps to protect the input and output modules with a
user-replaceable fuse. It also provides a protective earth (PE) connection for the island.

Voltage Groupings
I/O modules with different voltage requirements need to be isolated from each other in the
segment, and the PDMs serve this role. Each voltage group requires its own PDM

Standard PDM Power Distribution

A PDM is placed immediately to the right of the NIM in slot 2 on the island. The modules in a
specific voltage group follow in series to the right of the PDM. The following illustration shows a
standard STB PDT 2100 PDM supporting a cluster of 115 VAC I/O modules:

1 115 VAC sensor power signal to the PDM

2 115 VAC actuator power signal to the PDM

Notice that sensor power (to the input modules) and actuator power (to the output modules) are
brought to the island via separate two-pin connectors on the PDM.
The island layout shown above assumes that all the I/O modules in the segment use 115 VAC for
field power. Suppose, however, that your application requires a mix of 24 VDC and 115 VAC
modules. A second PDM (this time a standard STB PDT 3100 module) is used for the 24 VDC I/O.

26 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

NOTE: When you plan the layout of an island segment that contains a mixture of AC and DC
modules, we recommend that you place the AC voltage group(s) to the left of the DC voltage
group(s) in a segment.
In this case, the STB PDT 3100 PDM is placed directly to the right of the last 115 VAC module. It
terminates the sensor and actuator buses for the 115 VAC I/O voltage group and initiates new
sensor and actuator buses for the 24 VDC modules:

1 115 VAC sensor power signal to the PDM

2 115 VAC actuator power signal to the PDM
3 24 VDC sensor power signal to the PDM
4 24 VDC actuator power signal to the PDM

Each standard PDM contains a pair of time-lag fuses to help protect the I/O modules in the
segment.:
 a 10 A fuse for the actuator bus—connected to output modules
 a 5 A fuse for the sensor bus—connected to input modules

These fuses are user-replaceable.

31007720 08/2016 27
Theory of Operation

Basic PDM Power Distribution

If your island uses basic PDMs instead of standard PDMs, then actuator power and sensor power
are sent over a single power line:

Each basic PDM contains on 5 A time-lag fuse that helps to protect the I/O modules in the
segment. This fuse is user-replaceable.

28 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

PE Grounding
A captive screw terminal on the bottom of the PDM base makes contact with pin 12 (see page 35)
on each I/O base, establishing an island PE bus. The screw terminal on the PDM base meets IEC-
1131 requirements for field power protection. The screw terminal should be wired to the PE point
on your system.

31007720 08/2016 29
Theory of Operation

Sensor Power and Actuator Power Distribution on the Island Bus

Summary
The sensor bus and the actuator bus need to be powered separately from external sources.
Depending on your application, you may want to use the same or different external power supplies
to feed the sensor bus and the actuator bus. The source power is fed to 2 two-pin power connectors
on a PDM.
 The top connector is for the sensor power bus
 The bottom two-pin connector is for the actuator power bus

24 VDC Field Power Distribution

An external power supply delivers field power distributed to an STB PDT 3100 PDM.
The power components are not galvanically isolated. They are intended for use only in systems
designed to provide SELV isolation between the supply inputs or outputs and the load devices or
system power bus. Use SELV-rated supplies to provide 24 VDC source power to the NIM.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use only power supplies designed to provide SELV isolation between the � supply inputs,
outputs, load devices and system power bus.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE: Above 130 VAC, the relay module may compromise the double insulation provided by a
SELV-rated power supply.

CAUTION
COMPROMISED DOUBLE INSULATION
When you use a relay module, use separate external 24 VDC power supplies for the PDM
supporting that module and the logic power to the NIM or BOS module when the contact voltage
is above 130 VAC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

30 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

For more consistent system performance, use a separate 24 VDC supply for logic power to the
NIM and for field power to the PDM:

1 24 VDC signal to the NIM’s logic power supply

2 24 VDC signal to the segment’s sensor bus
3 24 VDC signal to the segment’s actuator bus
4 optional relay on the actuator bus

If the I/O load on the island bus is low and the system is operating in a low-noise environment, you
may use the same supply for both logic power and field power:

1 24 VDC signal to the NIM’s logic power supply

2 24 VDC signal to the segment’s sensor bus
3 24 VDC signal to the segment’s actuator bus
4 optional relay on the actuator bus

31007720 08/2016 31
Theory of Operation

NOTE: In the example above, a single power supply is used to provide 24 VDC to the NIM (for logic
power) and the PDM. If any of the modules supported by the PDM is an STB relay module that
operates at a contact voltage above 130 VAC, the double insulation provided by the SELV power
supply is no longer present. Therefore, you will need to use a separate 24 VDC power supply to
support the relay module.

115 and 230 VAC Field Power Distribution

AC field power is distributed across the island by an STB PDT 2100 PDM. It can accept field power
in the range 85 ... 264 VAC. The following illustration shows a simple view of 115 VAC power
distribution:

1 24 VDC signal to the NIM’s logic power supply

2 115 VAC signal to the segment’s sensor bus
3 115 VAC signal to the segment’s actuator bus
4 optional relay on the actuator bus

32 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

If the segment contains a mixture of both 115 VAC and 230 VAC I/O modules, you should take
care to install them in separate voltage groups and support the different voltages with separate
STB PDT 2100 PDMs:

1 24 VDC signal to the NIM’s logic power supply

2 115 VAC signal to the segment’s sensor bus
3 115 VAC signal to the segment’s actuator bus
4 optional relay on the actuator bus
5 230 VAC signal to the segment’s sensor bus
6 230 VAC signal to the segment’s actuator bus

31007720 08/2016 33
Theory of Operation

Communications Across the Island

Island Bus Architecture

Two sets of contacts on the left side of the base units—one set on the bottom and one on the top—
enable the island to support several different communication and power buses. The contacts on
the top left of a base support the island’s logic side functions. The contacts at the bottom left of a
base support the island’s field power side.

Logic Side Contacts

The following illustration shows the location of the contacts as they appear on all the I/O bases.
The six contacts at the top of the base support the logic side functionality:

1 reserved
2 common ground contact
3 5 VDC logic power contact
4 island bus communications (+) contact
5 island bus communications (-) contact
6 address line contact

34 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

The following table lists the way the logic-side contacts are implemented on the different base
units.

Base Unit Logic-side Contacts

STB XBA 1000 size 1 I/O base Contacts 2 ... 6 present and pass signals to the right. Contacts 2
and 3 terminate at the end of the segment; contacts 4, 5 and 6
pass to the end of the island bus.
STB XBA 2000 size 2 I/O base Contacts 2 ... 6 present and pass signals to the right. Contacts 2
and 3 terminate at the end of the segment; contacts 4, 5 and 6
pass to the end of the island bus
STB XBA 2200 size 2 PDM base Contacts 2 ... 6 present and pass signals to the right. Contacts 2
and 3 terminate at the end of the segment; contacts 4, 5 and 6
pass to the end of the island bus
STB XBA 2300 size 2 BOS base Contacts 2 ... 6 are present and pass signals to the right
STB XBA 2400 size 2 EOS base Contacts 1 ... 6 are present but the signals do not pass to the right
STB XBA 3000 size 3 I/O base Contacts 2 ... 6 present and pass signals to the right. Contacts 2
and 3 terminate at the end of the segment; contacts 4, 5 and 6
pass to the end of the island bus

Field Power Distribution Contacts

The following illustration highlights the contacts at the bottom of the base, which support the
island’s field power distribution functionality:

7 a DIN rail clip that provides functional ground for noise immunity, RFI, etc.
8 and 9 sensor bus
10 and 11 actuator bus
12 PE, established via a captive screw on the PDM base units

31007720 08/2016 35
Theory of Operation

The following table lists the way the field-side contacts are implemented on the different base units.

Base Unit Logic-side Contacts

STB XBA 1000 size 1 I/O base Contacts 7 ... 12 present. Contacts 7 and 12 are
always made. Contacts 8 and 9 are made for input
modules but not for output modules. Contacts 10 and
11 are made for output modules but not for input
modules.
STB XBA 2000 size 2 I/O base Contacts 7 ... 12 present. Contacts 7 and 12 are
always made. Contacts 8 and 9 are made for input
modules but not for output modules. Contacts 10 and
11 are made for output modules but not for input
modules.
STB XBA 2200 size 2 PDM base Contacts 7 and 12 present and are always made.
Contacts 8 ... 11 are not connected on the left side—
sensor and actuator power are delivered to the PDM
from external power sources and passed to the right.
STB XBA 2300 size 2 BOS base Contacts 7 ... 12 present but do not pass signals to
the right. The BOS module does not receive field
power.
STB XBA 2400 size 2 EOS base Contacts 7 ... 12 are present but do not pass signals
to the right. The EOS module does not receive field
power.
STB XBA 3000 type 3 I/O base Contacts 7 ... 12 present. Contacts 7 and 12 are
always made. Contacts 8 and 9 are made for input
modules but not for output modules. Contacts 10 and
11 are made for output modules but not for input
modules.

36 31007720 08/2016
 Theory of Operation

Operating Environment

Environmental Specifications
The following information describes system-wide environmental requirements and specifications
for the Advantys STB system.

Enclosure
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR
Publication 11, indicating there may be potential difficulties achieving electromagnetic compatibility
in other environments due to conducted and/or radiated disturbance.
All Advantys STB modules meet CE mark requirements for open equipment as defined by
EN61131-2, and should be installed in an enclosure that is designed for specific environmental
conditions and designed to help reduce the chance of personal injury resulting from access to live
parts. The interior of the enclosure should be accessible only by the use of a tool.
NOTE: Special requirements apply for enclosures located in hazardous (explosive) environments
(see Advantys STB, System Planning and Installation Guide).

Requirements
This equipment meets agency certification for UL, CSA, CE, FM class 1 div 2 and ATEX. This
equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in over-voltage
Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6500 ft)
without derating.

Parameter Specification
protection ref. EN61131-2 IP20, class 1
agency ref. EN61131-2 UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM
Class 1 Div. 2, CE, ATEX and Maritime
isolation voltage ref. EN61131-2 1500 VDC field-to-bus for 24 VDC
2500 VDC field-to-bus for 115/230 VAC
Note: No internal isolation voltage; isolation requirements should be met by using
SELV-based external power supply.
over-voltage class ref. EN61131-2 category II
operating temperature range 0 ... 60° C (32 ... 140° F)
extended operating -25 ... 0° C (-13 ... 32° F) and 60 ... 70° C (140 ... 158° F) for qualified modules (see
temperature ranges (see Advantys STB, System Planning and Installation Guide)
storage temperature -40 ... +85° C (-40 ... +185° F)
maximum humidity 95% relative humidity @ 60° C (non-condensing)
supply voltage variation, IEC 61000-4-11
interruption, shut-down and ref. 61131-2
start-up

31007720 08/2016 37
Theory of Operation

Parameter Specification
shock ref. IEC68, part 2-27 +/-15 g peak, 11 ms, half-sine wave for 3 shocks/axis
operating altitude 2000 m (2187 yd)
transport altitude 3000 m (3281 yd)
free-fall ref. EN61131-2 1 m (1.09 yd)
agency certifications ATEX @ 0 to 60°C and FM @ extended temperature ranges for specified modules
(see Advantys STB, System Planning and Installation Guide)

Electromagnetic Susceptibility
The following table lists the electromagnetic susceptibility specifications:

Characteristic Specification
electrostatic discharge ref. EN61000-4-2
radiated ref. EN61000-4-3
fast transients ref. EN61000-4-4
surge withstand (transients) ref. EN61000-4-5
conducted RF ref. EN61000-4-6

Radiated Emission
The following table lists the emission specification ranges:

Description Specification Range

radiated emission ref. EN 55011 Class A 30 ... 230 MHz, 10 m @ 40 dBμV
230 ... 1000 MHz, 10 m @ 47 dBμV

38 31007720 08/2016
 Advantys STB
Digital Input Modules
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 2
The Advantys STB Digital Input Modules

The Advantys STB Digital Input Modules

Overview
This chapter describes the features of the standard and basic Advantys STB digital input modules.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
2.1 STB DDI 3230 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (two-channel, four-wire, 40
IEC type 2, 0.2 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected)
2.2 STB DDI 3420 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-wire, 53
IEC type 3, 0.5 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected)
2.3 STB DDI 3425 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-wire, 67
IEC type 3)
2.4 STB DDI 3610 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-wire, 78
IEC type 1, fixed 1 ms)
2.5 STB DDI 3615 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-wire, 92
IEC type 1)
2.6 STB DDI 3725 High Density Input Module 102
2.7 STB DAI 5230 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire, IEC 116
type 1)
2.8 STB DAI 5260 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, isolated, IEC 127
type 1)
2.9 STB DAI 7220 Digital 230 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire, 138
IEC type 1)

31007720 08/2016 39
Digital Input Modules

Section 2.1
STB DDI 3230 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (two-channel, four-wire, IEC type 2, 0.2 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected)

STB DDI 3230 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (two-channel,

four-wire, IEC type 2, 0.2 ms-configurable, short-circuit
protected)

Overview
This section provides a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDI 3230 digital input module—
its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and configuration
options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3230 Physical Description 41
STB DDI 3230 LED Indicators 43
STB DDI 3230 Field Wiring 45
STB DDI 3230 Functional Description 47
STB DDI 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image 50
STB DDI 3230 Specifications 51

40 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3230 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 1
I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the top connector
and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensor 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 sensor 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 41
Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts can be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DDI 3230 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spripng clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

42 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DDI 3230 module provide visual indications of the operating status of
module and its two digital input channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

LED Locations
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the module directly below the model
number. The figure below shows their locations:

31007720 08/2016 43
Digital Input Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the communications
power is absent from the input channels when a watchdog
time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
flicker* Field power absent or a PDM short circuit Check power
detected.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network connections,
replace NIM
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.

44 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3230 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the
top connector, and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types and
field wire types are described below, and a field wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3230 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-, three-, or four-wire sensors that draw current up to:
 100 mA at 30 degrees C
 50 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
The module has IEC type 2 inputs designed to support sensor signals from solid state devices or
mechanical contact switching devices such as relay contacts, push buttons (in normal or harsh
environmental conditions), and two- or three-wire proximity switches.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wires in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 (24 ...
16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connections on pin 6.

31007720 08/2016 45
Digital Input Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports the input from sensor 1, and the bottom connector supports the input
from sensor 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field device +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
accessories device accessories
2 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field device +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
accessories device accessories
3 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 2
4 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)
5 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)
6 protective earth protective earth

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two sensors connected to the STB DDI 3230 module:

1 +24 VDC for sensor 1 (top) and for sensor 2 (bottom)

3 input from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 2 (bottom)
5 field power return to the module from sensor 1
6 protective earth connection for actuator 1 (top)

The four-wire sensor on the top connector has a PE connection that is tied to the PE connection
on the PDM base through pin 6.

46 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3230 is a two-channel module that handles digital input data from two 24 VDC field
sensors. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following operating
parameters on the module:
 an input filter time constant for the module
 logic normal or logic reverse input polarity for each channel on the module
Using the RTP feature in your NIM, you can access the value of the following parameter:
 Input Filter Time Constant
Refer to the Advanced Configuration chapter in your NIM manual for general information on RTP.
NOTE: Standard NIMs with firmware version 2.0 or higher support RTP. RTP is not available in
Basic NIMs.

Input Filter Time Constant

By default, the module filters the two input channels for 1.0 ms on-to-off and 1.0 ms off-to-on. If you
want to change this input filtering value, you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
The following filter time constants may be configured:
 0.2 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 0.5 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 1.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 2.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 4.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 8.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
 16.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
Advantys STB products are designed to perform reliably at 1 ms in normal operating environments
(see page 37). If your island is operating in a harsher environment, you may set the filter time
constant above 1 ms. In this case, performance will be slower.
If your application requires faster performance and if the island is operating in a low-noise
environment, you may set the filter time constant below 1 ms. However, performance reliability
cannot be guaranteed when the filter time is below 1 ms.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Operating with a filter time constant that is faster than 1 ms makes the system more susceptible
to power transients and environmental noise.
Qualify the behavior of your system if you set the filter time to 0.2 ms or 0.5 ms.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

31007720 08/2016 47
Digital Input Modules

To configure the input filter time constant:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDI 3230 module The selected STB DDI 3230 module
you want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value -
column of the Filter Time Constant row,
select the desired time constant.

The input filter time constant is configured at the module level. One parameter value is set, and it
applies to both input channels.
The value stored in the input filter time constant parameter is 10 times the actual value (in
milliseconds) of the filter time constant.
This parameter is represented as an unsigned 8-bit number. To access this parameter using RTP,
write the following values to the RTP request block:

Length 1
Index (low byte) 0x02
Index (high byte) 0x20
Sub-index 0
Data Byte 1 0x02 for filter time constant of 0.2 ms
0x05 for filter time constant of 0.5 ms
0x0A for filter time constant of 1.0 ms
0x14 for filter time constant of 2.0 ms
0x28 for filter time constant of 4.0 ms
0x50 for filter time constant of 8.0 ms
0xA0 for filter time constant of 16.0 ms

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on both input channels is logic normal, where:
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 an input value of 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from the logic normal (0) or back to normal from logic
reverse (1), use the Advantys configuration software.

48 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

You can configure input polarity values independently for each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDI 3230 you The selected STB DDI 3230 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Input Polarity row further Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the settings at the module Notice that when you select the Input
level, select the integer that appears in Polarity value, the max/min values of the
the Value column of the Input Polarity range appear at the bottom of the module
row and enter a hexadecimal or editor screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Input
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an input
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Input Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 1 to logic
menu. normal and channel 2 to logic reverse, the
Input Polarity value changes to 2.

31007720 08/2016 49
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data and Status

The STB DDI 3230 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in two 16-bit registers—one for data and one for error-detection
status. The information can be read by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by
an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3230 module is represented by two
contiguous registers in this block—the data register followed by the status register. The specific
registers used in the block are determined by the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DDI 3230 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) in the represents the on/off state of input 1, and the bit to its immediate
left represents the on/off state of input 2:

Input Status Register

The second STB DDI 3230 register in the input block of the process image is the status register.
The STB DDI 3230 performs on-board error input filtering and short circuit power protection. The
two LSBs in the status register indicate whether or not the module has detected a fault. The fault
might be field power absent or a short circuit on the island’s sensor bus:

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.

50 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3230 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 2 sink input

number of input channels two
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported as inputs only1
input protection resistor-limited
isolation field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected from
damage
logic bus current consumption 55 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 200 mA, with no load
input voltage on +11 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 6 mA min.
off 2 mA max.
input impedance 3.3 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 56 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant default 1.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
user-configurable 0.2 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
settings1 0.5 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
1.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
2.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
4.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
8.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
16.0 ms (+/-0.1 ms)
input response time on-to-off 625 μs @ 0.2 ms input filter time
off-to-on 610 μs @ 0.2 ms input filter time
polarity of the individual default logic normal on both channels
input channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by channel
settings
logic normal, configurable by channel
sensor bus power for accessories 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C

31007720 08/2016 51
Digital Input Modules

over-current protection for accessory power yes

field power requirements field power voltage from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1Requires
the Advantys configuration software.

52 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Section 2.2
STB DDI 3420 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-wire, IEC type 3, 0.5 ms-configurable, short-circuit protected)

STB DDI 3420 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-

channel, three-wire, IEC type 3, 0.5 ms-configurable, short-
circuit protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDI 3420 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3420 Physical Description 54
STB DDI 3420 LED Indicators 56
STB DDI 3420 Field Wiring 58
STB DDI 3420 Functional Description 60
STB DDI 3420 Data and Status for the Process Image 63
STB DDI 3420 Specifications 65

31007720 08/2016 53
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3420 is a standard Advantys STB four-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 1
I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1 and 2 are wired to the top
connector, and sensors 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensors 1 and 2 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 sensors 3 and 4 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

54 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDI 3420 K), which includes:
 one STB DDI 3420 digital input module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDI 3420 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 55
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 LED Indicators

Overview
The six LEDs on the STB DDI 3420 module provide visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its four digital input channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The six LEDs are positioned in a column at the top of the STB DDI 3420 digital input module. The
figure below shows their location:

56 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the six LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on Voltage is present on input channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 3.
on Voltage is present on input channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 4.
on on on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the power is the communications
absent from the input channels when a watchdog time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
flicker* Field power absent or a PDM short circuit Check power
detected.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart
the communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.
31007720 08/2016 57
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3420 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1 and 2 are
wired to the top connector, and sensors 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector. The choices of
connector types and field wire types are described below, and a field wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in kits of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in kits of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3430 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two- or three-wire sensors that draw current up to:
 100 mA/channel at 30 degrees C
 50 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
The module has IEC type 3 inputs designed to work with sensor signals from mechanical switching
devices such as relay contacts, push buttons (in normal-to-moderate environmental conditions),
three-wire proximity switches and two-wire proximity switches that have:
 a voltage drop of no more than 8 V
 a minimum operating current capability less than or equal to 2.5 mA
 a maximum off-state current less than or equal to 1.5 mA

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

58 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports sensors 1 and 2, and the bottom connector supports sensors 3 and 4:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
device accessories device accessories
2 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 3
3 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)
4 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
device accessories device accessories
5 input from sensor 2 input from sensor 4
6 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two- and three-wire sensors connected to the
STB DDI 3420:

1 +24 VDC for sensor 1 (top and for sensor 3 (bottom)

2 input from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 3 (bottom)
3 field power return from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 3 (bottom)
4 +24 VDC for sensor 2 (top and for sensor 4 (bottom)
5 input from sensor 2 (top) and sensor 4 (bottom)

31007720 08/2016 59
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3420 is a four-channel module that handles digital input data from four 24 VDC field
sensors. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following operating
parameters on the module:
 an input filter time constant for the module
 logic normal or logic reverse input polarity for each channel on the module
Using the RTP feature in your NIM, you can access the value of the following parameter:
 Input Filter Time Constant
Refer to the Advanced Configuration chapter in your NIM manual for general information on RTP.
NOTE: Standard NIMs with firmware version 2.0 or higher support RTP. RTP is not available in
Basic NIMs.

Input Filter Time Constant

By default, the module filters each input channel for 1.0 ms on-to-off and 1.0 ms off-to-on. To
increase or lower the input filtering value, you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
The following user-configurable input filtering times are available:
 0.5 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
 1.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
 2.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
 4.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
 8.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
 16.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
Advantys STB products are designed to perform reliably at 1 ms in normal operating environments
(see page 37). If your island is operating in a harsher environment, you may set the filter time
constant above 1 ms. In this case, performance will be slower.
If your application requires faster performance and if the island is operating in a low-noise
environment, you may set the filter time constant below 1 ms. However, performance reliability
cannot be guaranteed when the filter time is below 1 ms.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Operating with a filter time constant that is faster than 1 ms makes the system more susceptible
to power transients and environmental noise.
Qualify the behavior of your system if you set the filter time to 0.5 ms.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

60 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

To configure the input filter time constant:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDI 3420 you want The selected STB DDI 3420 module
to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value
column of the Filter Time Constant row,
select the desired time constant.

The input filter time constant is configured at the module level. One parameter value is set, and it
applies to all four input channels.
The value stored in the input filter time constant parameter is 4 times the actual value (in
milliseconds) of the filter time constant.
This parameter is represented as an unsigned 8-bit number. To access this parameter using RTP,
write the following values to the RTP request block:

Length 1
Index (low byte) 0x02
Index (high byte) 0x20
Sub-index 0
Data Byte 1 0x02 for filter time constant of 0.5 ms
0x04 for filter time constant of 1.0 ms
0x08 for filter time constant of 2.0 ms
0x10 for filter time constant of 4.0 ms
0x20 for filter time constant of 8.0 ms
0x40 for filter time constant of 16.0 ms

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on all four input channels is logic normal, where:
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 1indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or more of the channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse,
where:
 an input value of 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from logic normal (0) or back to normal from logic reverse
(1), you need to use the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 61
Digital Input Modules

You can configure input polarity values independently on each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDI 3420 you The selected STB DDI 3420 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
4 Expand the + Input Polarity row further Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2,
by clicking on the + sign. Channel 3 and Channel 4 appear.
5a To change the polarity settings at the Notice that when you select the Input
module level, select the integer that Polarity value, the max/min values of the
appears in the Value column of the range appear at the bottom of the module
Input Polarity row and enter a editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new integer value for
range 0 to 15 (0x0 to 0xF), where 0 Input Polarity, the values associated with
means that all channels have normal the channels change.
polarity and 0xF means that all four For example, if you choose an input
channels have reverse polarity. polarity value of 6, Channel 1 and
Channel 4 will have normal polarity, while
Channel 2 and Channel 3 will have
reverse polarity.
5b To change the polarity settings at the When you accept a new integer value for
channel level, double click on the a channel setting, the value for the
channel values you want to change, module in the Input Polarity row changes.
then select the desired settings from For example, if you set channels 1 and 4
the pull-down menu. to normal polarity and channels 2 and 3 to
reverse polarity, the Input Polarity value
changes to 6.

62 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data and Status

The STB DDI 3420 sends a representation of the operating state of its input points to the NIM. The
NIM stores this information in two 16-bit registers—one for data and one for error-detection status.
The information can be read by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by an HMI
panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3420 module is represented by two
contiguous registers in this block—the data register followed by the status register. The specific
registers used are based on the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DDI 3420 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) in the represents the on/off state of input 1, and the three bits to its
immediate left represent the on/off states of inputs 2, 3, and 4 respectively:

31007720 08/2016 63
Digital Input Modules

Input Status Register

The second STB DDI 3420 register in the input block of the process image is the status register.
The STB DDI 3420 provides on-board error input filtering and short circuit power protection. The
four LSBs indicate whether or not the module has detected a fault. The fault might be field power
absent or a short circuit on the island’s sensor bus:

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.

64 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3420 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 3 sink input

number of input channels four
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported as inputs only1
input protection resistor-limited
isolation field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected from
damage
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 400 mA, with no load
input voltage on 11 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 2.5 mA min.
off 1.2 mA max.
input impedance 2.8 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 56 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant default 1.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
user-configurable 0.5 ms (+/-0.25 ms))
settings1 1.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
2.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
4.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
8.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
16.0 ms (+/-0.25 ms)
input response time on-to-off 1.35 ms @ 05 ms input filter time
off-to-on 925 μs @ 0.5 ms input filter time
polarity of the individual default logic normal on all channels
input channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by
settings1 channel
logic normal, configurable by channel
sensor bus power for accessories 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C

31007720 08/2016 65
Digital Input Modules

over-current protection for accessory power yes

field power requirements field power voltage from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1Requires
the Advantys configuration software.

66 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Section 2.3
STB DDI 3425 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-channel, three-wire, IEC type 3)

STB DDI 3425 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (four-

channel, three-wire, IEC type 3)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDI 3425 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3425 Physical Description 68
STB DDI 3425 LED Indicators 70
STB DDI 3425 Field Wiring 72
STB DDI 3425 Functional Description 74
STB DDI 3425 Data for the Process Image 75
STB DDI 3425 Specifications 76

31007720 08/2016 67
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3425 is a basic Advantys STB four-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 1
I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1 and 2 are wired to the top
connector, and sensors 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensors 1 and 2 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 sensors 3 and 4 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

68 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDI 3425 K), which includes:
 one STB DDI 3425 digital input module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDI 3425 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 69
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 LED Indicators

Overview
The five LEDs on the STB DDI 3425 module provide visual indications of the operating status of
the module and its four digital input channels.

Location
The LEDs are located on the front bezel of the module below the model number:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the five LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Meaning

off The module is either not receiving logic
power, has experienced a watchdog
timer error or has failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in progress.

70 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Meaning

on The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on Voltage is present on input channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 3.
on Voltage is present on input channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 4.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until
the causal condition changes.

31007720 08/2016 71
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3425 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1 and 2 are
wired to the top connector, and sensors 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in kits of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in kits of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3425 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two- or three-wire sensors that draw current up to:
 50 mA/channel at 30 degrees C
 25 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
The module has IEC type 3 inputs designed to work with sensor signals from mechanical switching
devices such as relay contacts, push buttons (in normal-to-moderate environmental conditions),
three-wire proximity switches and two-wire proximity switches that have:
 a voltage drop of no more than 8 V
 a minimum operating current capability less than or equal to 2.5 mA
 a maximum off-state current less than or equal to 1.5 mA

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

72 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports sensors 1 and 2, and the bottom connector supports sensors 3 and 4:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
device accessories device accessories
2 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 3
3 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)
4 +24 VDC from sensor bus for field +24 VDC from sensor bus for field
device accessories device accessories
5 input from sensor 2 input from sensor 4
6 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two- and three-wire sensors connected to the
STB DDI 3425:

1 +24 VDC for sensor 1 (top and for sensor 3 (bottom)

2 input from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 3 (bottom)
3 field power return from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 3 (bottom)
4 +24 VDC for sensor 2 (top and for sensor 4 (bottom)
5 input from sensor 2 (top) and sensor 4 (bottom)

31007720 08/2016 73
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3425 is a four-channel module that handles digital input data from four 24 VDC field
sensors. It does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex actions.

Input Filter Time Constant

The module filters each input channel for 3.0 ms on-to-off and 3.0 ms off-to-on.

Input Polarity
The input polarity on all four input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)

74 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DDI 3425 sends a representation of the operating state of its input points to the NIM. The
NIM stores this information in a 16-bit data register. The information can be read by the fieldbus
master. If you are not using a basic NIM, the information can also be read by an HMI panel
connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3425 module is represented by one register
in this block. The specific registers used are based on the module’s physical location on the island
bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus.

Input Data Register

The least significant bit in the register represents the on/off state of input 1, and the three bits to its
immediate left represent the on/off states of inputs 2, 3, and 4 respectively:

31007720 08/2016 75
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3425 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 3 sink input

number of input channels four
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
input protection resistor-limited
isolation field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected
from damage
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 200 mA, with no load
input voltage on 11 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 2.5 mA min.
off 1.2 mA max.
input impedance 2.8 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 56 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant 3.0 ms
input response time on-to-off 3.8 ms
off-to-on 3.5 ms
polarity logic normal on all channels
sensor bus power for accessories 50 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
25 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C
over-current protection for accessory power yes
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C

76 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System

Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.

31007720 08/2016 77
Digital Input Modules

Section 2.4
STB DDI 3610 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-wire, IEC type 1, fixed 1 ms)

STB DDI 3610 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel,

two-wire, IEC type 1, fixed 1 ms)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDI 3610 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3610 Physical Description 79
STB DDI 3610 LED Indicators 81
STB DDI 3610 Field Wiring 84
STB DDI 3610 Functional Description 86
STB DDI 3610 Data for the Process Image 88
STB DDI 3610 Specifications 90

78 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3610 is a standard Advantys STB six-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 1
I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1, 2 and 3 are wired to the top
connector, and sensors 4, 5 and 6 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensors 1 ... 3 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 sensors 4 ... 6 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 79
Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDI 3610 K), which includes:
 one STB DDI 3610 digital input module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDI 3610 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

80 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 LED Indicators

Overview
The eight LEDs on the STB DDI 3610 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its six digital input channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The eight LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DDI 3610 digital input
module. The figure below shows their location:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the eight LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Meaning What to Do
off off The module is either not Check power
receiving logic power or
has failed.

31007720 08/2016 81
Digital Input Modules

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Meaning What to Do
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in
progress.
on off The module has achieved
all of the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its
confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input

channel 1.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 2.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 3.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 4.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 5.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 5.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 6.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 6.
on on on on on on on on The watchdog has timed Cycle power,
out. restart the
communications
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the power is absent
from the input channels when a watchdog time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-
operational mode.
flicker* Field power absent or a Check power
PDM short circuit detected.

82 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Meaning What to Do
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been Cycle power,
detected. restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not Check network
running. connections,
replace NIM
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.

31007720 08/2016 83
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3610 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1, 2 and 3 are
wired to the top connector, and sensors 4, 5 and 6 are wired to the bottom connector. The choices
of connector types and field wire types are described below, and a field wiring example is
presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3610 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire sensors.
The module has IEC type 1 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 .to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital sensors 1, 2 and 3; the bottom connector supports digital
sensors 4, 5 and 6:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC sensor bus power +24 VDC sensor bus power
2 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 4
3 +24 VDC sensor bus power +24 VDC sensor bus power
4 input from sensor 2 input from sensor 5
5 +24 VDC sensor bus power +24 VDC sensor bus power
6 input from sensor 3 input from sensor 6

84 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following illustration shows a field wiring example where six two-wire switches are connected
to the STB DDI 3610:

1 +24 VDC to sensor 1 (top) and to sensor 4 (bottom)

2 input from sensor 1 (top) and sensor 4 (bottom)
3 +24 VDC to sensor 2 (top) and to sensor 5 (bottom)
4 input from sensor 2 (top) and sensor 5 (bottom)
5 +24 VDC to sensor 3 (top) and to sensor 6 (bottom)
6 input from sensor 3 (top) and sensor 6 (bottom)

31007720 08/2016 85
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3610 is a six-channel module that handles digital input data from six 24 VDC field
sensors. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize each channel for logic
normal or logic reverse input polarity.

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on all six input channels is logic normal, where:
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or more of the channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse,
where:
 an input value of 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 an input value of 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure input polarity values independently for each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDI 3610 you The selected STB DDI 3610 module opens
want to configure in the island editor. in the software module editor.
2 Choose the format in which you want your Hexadecimal values will appear in the editor
values to be displayed by either checking if the box is checked; decimal values will
or unchecking the Hexadecimal checkbox appear if the box is unchecked.
(at the top right of the editor.
3 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
4 Expand the + Input Polarity row further by Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel 3,
clicking on the + sign. Channel 4, Channel 5 and Channel 6
appear.
5a To change the polarity settings at the Notice that when you select the Input
module level, select the integer that Polarity value, the maxi/min values of the
appears in the Value column of the Input range appear at the bottom of the module
Polarity row and enter a hexadecimal or editor screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 63 Notice that when you accept a new integer
(0x0 to 0x3F), where 0 means that all six value for Input Polarity, the values
channels have normal polarity and 0x3F associated with the channels change.
means that all six channels have reverse For example, if you choose an input polarity
polarity. value of 0x2F, Channel 5 will have normal
polarity and the other five channels will have
reverse polarity.

86 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Step Action Result

5b To change the polarity settings at the When you accept a new integer value for a
channel level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module in
values you want to change, then select the Input Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 5 to normal
menu. polarity and the other five channel to reverse
polarity, the Input Polarity value changes to
0x2F.

31007720 08/2016 87
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DDI 3610 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in two 16-bit registers—one for data and one for error-detection
status. The information can be read by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by
an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3610 module is represented by two
contiguous registers in this block—the data register followed by the status register. The specific
registers used in the block are determined by the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DDI 3610 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) represents the on/off state of input 1, and the five bits to its immediate
left represent the on/off states of inputs 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively:

88 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

Input Status Register

The second STB DDI 3610 register in the input block of the process image is the status register.
The STB DDI 3610 provide on-board error input filtering and short circuit power protection. The six
LSBs indicate whether or not the module has detected a fault. The fault might be field power absent
or a short circuit on the island’s sensor bus:

NOTE: The detection of error conditions on the PDM input power connection may be delayed by
as much as 15 ms from the event, depending on the sensor bus load, the system configuration and
the nature of the fault.
Field power faults that are local to the input module are reported immediately.

31007720 08/2016 89
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3610 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 1 sink input

number of input channels six
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported for inputs only1
input protection resistor-limited
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected
from damage
logic bus current consumption 55 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 60 mA, with no load
input voltage on +15 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 2 mA min.
off 0.5 mA max.
input impedance 5.3 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 56 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant 1.0 ms
input response time on-to-off 1.74 ms
off-to-on 1.21 ms
polarity of the individual input default logic normal on both channels
channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by
settings1 channel
logic normal, configurable by
channel
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C

90 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System

Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 91
Digital Input Modules

Section 2.5
STB DDI 3615 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel, two-wire, IEC type 1)

STB DDI 3615 Digital 24 VDC Sink Input Module (six-channel,

two-wire, IEC type 1)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDI 3615 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3615 Physical Description 93
STB DDI 3615 LED Indicators 95
STB DDI 3615 Field Wiring 97
STB DDI 3615 Functional Description 99
STB DDI 3615 Data for the Process Image 100
STB DDI 3615 Specifications 101

92 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3615 is a basic Advantys STB six-channel digital input module that reads inputs from
24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 1 I/O
base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1, 2 and 3 are wired to the top
connector, and sensors 4, 5 and 6 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensors 1 ... 3 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 sensors 4 ... 6 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 93
Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDI 3615 K), which includes:
 one STB DDI 3615 digital input module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDI 3615 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

94 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 LED Indicators

Overview
The seven LEDs on the STB DDI 3615 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its six digital input channels.

Location
The LEDs are located on the front bezel of the module below the model number

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the seven LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Meaning

off The module is either not
receiving logic power, has
experienced a watchdog
timer error or has failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in
progress.

31007720 08/2016 95
Digital Input Modules

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Meaning

on The module has achieved
all of the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its
confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input

channel 1.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 2.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 3.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 4.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 5.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 5.
on Voltage is present on input
channel 6.
off Voltage is absent on input
channel 6.
blink 1** The module is in pre-
operational mode.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until
the causal condition changes.

96 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3615 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensors 1 ... 3 are wired
to the top connector, and sensors 4 ... 6 are wired to the bottom connector.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 Two screw type field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 20 (model STB XTS 1100)
 Two spring clamp field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 20 (model STB XTS 2100)
NOTE: These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in)
pitch between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3615 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire sensors.
The module has IEC type 1 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.51 ... 1.29 mm
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital sensors 1, 2 and 3; the bottom connector supports digital
sensors 4, 5 and 6. Two terminals on each connector support each of the six sensors:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC Field Power +24 VDC Field Power
(from the PDM) (from the PDM)
2 Input from Sensor 1 Input from Sensor 4
3 +24 VDC Field Power +24 VDC Field Power
(from the PDM) (from the PDM)
4 Input from Sensor 2 Input from Sensor 5
5 +24 VDC Field Power +24 VDC Field Power
(from the PDM) (from the PDM)
6 Input from Sensor 3 Input from Sensor 6

31007720 08/2016 97
Digital Input Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following illustration shows an example where six two-wire sensors are field wiring to the
STB DDI 3615.

98 31007720 08/2016
 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3615 is a six-channel module that handles digital input data from six 24 VDC field
sensors. It does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex actions.

Input Polarity
The input polarity on all six input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)

31007720 08/2016 99
Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DDI 3615 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in a 16-bit data register. The information can be read by the
fieldbus master. If you are not using a basic NIM, the information can also be read by an HMI panel
connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3615 module is represented by one register
in this block. The specific registers used in the block are determined by the module’s physical
location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The least significant bit represents the on/off state of input 1, and the five bits to its immediate left
represent the on/off states of inputs 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively:

100 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3615 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 1 sink input

number of input channels six
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
input protection resistor-limited
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected
from damage
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 60 mA, with no load
input voltage on +15 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 2 mA min.
off 0.5 mA max.
input impedance 5.3 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 56 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant 5.0 ms
input response time on-to-off 5.75 ms
off-to-on 5.25 ms
polarity of the individual input channels logic normal
field power requirements field power voltage from a 24 VDC PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.

31007720 08/2016 101

Digital Input Modules

Section 2.6
STB DDI 3725 High Density Input Module

STB DDI 3725 High Density Input Module

Introduction
The STB DDI 3725 - described below - is a basic Advantys STB sixteen-channel digital input
module.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDI 3725 Physical Description 103
STB DDI 3725 LED Indicators 105
STB DDI 3725 Field Wiring 108
STB DDI 3725 Functional Description 112
STB DDI 3725 Data for the Process Image 113
STB DDI 3725 Specifications 114

102 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDI 3725 is a basic Advantys STB sixteen-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 24 VDC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 3
base and uses two 18-pin field wiring connectors. The connectors are positioned side-by-side on
the bezel; connector A (which supports input channels 1 ... 8) is on the left, and connector B (which
supports input channels 9 ... 16) is on the right.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 light blue identification stripe, indicating a digital DC input module
5 sensor power groups 1 and 2 are wired to the left connector (A)
6 sensor power groups 3 and 4 are wired to the right connector (B)

31007720 08/2016 103

Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered in either of two kits:
 STB DDI 3725 KS which includes:
 one STB DDI 3725 digital input module
 one size 3 STB XBA 3000 (see page 375) I/O base
 two 18-terminal screw type connectors

 STB DDI 3725 KC, which includes:

 one STB DDI 3725 digital input module
 one size 3 STB XBA 3000 (see page 375) I/O base
 two 18-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDI 3275 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 3000 size 3 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1180) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2180)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
 the STB XTS 5510 and STB XTS 6510 high density I/O Telefast connector interfaces
(see page 389) can replace the standard field wiring connectors and facilitate a Telefast
connection
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide.

104 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 LED Indicators

Overview
The seventeen LEDs on the STB DDI 3725 module are visual indications of the operating status
of the module and its sixteen digital input channels.

Location
The LEDs are positioned in two columns at the top of the STB DDI 3725 digital input module’s
bezel. Indicators for the RDY signal and input channels 1...8 are in the left column, and input
channels 9...16 in the right column.

Indications
The following two-part table defines the meaning of the 17 LEDs (where an empty cell indicates
that the pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter). The STB DDI 3725 high-density digital
input module features 16 green LEDs to indicate the state of each input point, and one green RDY
LED to indicate the health of the input module. The first part of the table corresponds to the left
column of LED indicators:

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 Meaning
off The module is either not receiving logic
power, has experienced a watchdog
timer error or has failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in progress.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.

31007720 08/2016 105

Digital Input Modules

RDY IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 Meaning
on The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input ch. 1.

off Voltage is absent on input ch. 1.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 2.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 2.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 3.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 3.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 4.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 4.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 5.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 5.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 6.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 6.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 7.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 7.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 8.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 8.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.

106 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

The second part of the table describes the combination of the left column RDY indicator plus the
right column LED indicators:

RDY IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Meaning
on Voltage is present on input ch. 9
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 9.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 10.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 10.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 11.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 11.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 12.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 12.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 13.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 13.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 14
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 14.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 15.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 15.
on Voltage is present on input ch. 16.
off Voltage is absent on input ch. 16
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.

31007720 08/2016 107

Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDI 3725 module uses two eighteen-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor power
group 1 (sensors 1-4) and sensor power group 2 (sensors 5-8) are wired to the left connector (A);
sensor power group 3 (sensors 9-12) and sensor power group 4 (sensors 13-16) are wired to the
right connector (B).

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1180 screw type field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 2
 two STB XTS 2180 spring clamp field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 2
These field wiring connectors each have eighteen-connection terminals, with a 3.81 mm (0.15 in)
pitch between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DDI 3725 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire and three-wire sensors.
The module has IEC type 3 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions, and solid
state input devices such as proximity switches.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.51 ... 1.52 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The left connector supports digital sensor power groups 1 and 2; the right connector supports
digital sensor power groups 3 and 4. Two terminals on each connector support each of the sixteen
sensors, as follows:

Pin Left Connector Right Connector

1 Sensor power group 1 (+) Sensor power group 3 (+)
2 Input from Sensor 1 Input from Sensor 9
3 Sensor power group 1 (+) Sensor power group 3 (+)
4 Input from Sensor 2 Input from Sensor 10
5 Sensor power group 1 (+) Sensor power group 3 (+)
6 Input from Sensor 3 Input from Sensor 11

108 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

Pin Left Connector Right Connector

7 Sensor power group 1 (+) Sensor power group 3 (+)
8 Input from Sensor 4 Input from Sensor 12
9 Sensor power (-) for a 3-wire sensor Sensor power (-) for a 3-wire sensor
(PDM-) (PDM-)
10 Sensor power group 2 (+) Sensor power group 4 (+)
11 Input from Sensor 5 Input from Sensor 13
12 Sensor power group 2 (+) Sensor power group 4 (+)
13 Input from Sensor 6 Input from Sensor 14
14 Sensor power group 2 (+) Sensor power group 4 (+)
15 Input from Sensor 7 Input from Sensor 15
16 Sensor power group 2 (+) Sensor power group 4 (+)
17 Input from Sensor 8 Input from Sensor 16
18 Sensor power (-) for a 3-wire sensor Sensor power (-) for a 3-wire sensor
(PDM-) (PDM-)

31007720 08/2016 109

Digital Input Modules

Sample Wiring Diagrams

The following illustration shows 16 two-wire sensors: sensors 1-4 in group 1 and sensors 5-8 in
group 2 connected to the left-side connector (A); and sensors 9-12 in group 3 and sensors 13-16
in group 4 connected to the right-side connector (B). When only two-wire sensors are used, pins 9
and 18 on both connectors are not used:

110 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

The following illustration shows you how you could connect four 3-wire sensors - one per input
group - using the pins 9 and 18:

31007720 08/2016 111

Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDI 3725 is a sixteen-channel module that handles digital input data from 4 groups of
four 24 VDC field sensors. The module’s operating parameters are auto-configured when the
module is installed. The module does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex
actions.

Input Polarity
The input polarity on all sixteen input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)

Module Sensor Power

The module provides sensor power on a per group basis. Refer to the Field Wiring Pinout section,
below, for a listing of sensor power groups. Each sensor power connection is thermally protected.
In the event of a short-circuit, all field devices that receive power from this connection will no longer
receive power. When the short-circuit condition is removed, power will be restored to all devices in
that sensor power group.

112 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DDI 3725 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in a 16-bit data register. The information can be read by the
fieldbus master. If you are not using a basic NIM, the information can also be read by an HMI panel
connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The STB DDI 3725 module is represented by one register
in this block. The specific registers used in the block are determined by the module’s physical
location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The least significant bit represents the on/off state of input 1, and all remaining bits to its left
represent the on/off states of inputs 2...16, respectively:

31007720 08/2016 113

Digital Input Modules

STB DDI 3725 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC IEC type 3 sink input

number of input channels 16
module width 28.1 mm (1.11 in)
I/O base STB XBA 3000 (see page 375)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
input protection resistor-limited
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM the module is internally protected from damage
logic bus current consumption 100 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 30 mA, with no load
Sensor power per group 50 mA
per module 200 mA
input voltage on +11 ... 30 VDC
off -3 ... +5 VDC
input current on 2 mA min. @ 11 V
off 1.5 mA
input impedance 5.3 kΩ @ 30 V
absolute maximum input continuous 30 VDC
for 1.3 ms 35 VDC, decaying pulse
input filter time constant 1 ms
input response time on-to-off 2 ms
off-to-on 2 ms
polarity of the individual input channels logic normal
field power requirements field power voltage from a 24 VDC PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60 °C
storage temperature -40 to 85 °C

114 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning

and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation
Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow the user to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the Advantys
STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete summary of cabalities
and limitations.

31007720 08/2016 115

Digital Input Modules

Section 2.7
STB DAI 5230 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire, IEC type 1)

STB DAI 5230 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel,

three-wire, IEC type 1)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DAI 5230 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DAI 5230 Physical Description 117
STB DAI 5230 LED Indicators 119
STB DAI 5230 Field Wiring 121
STB DAI 5230 Functional Description 123
STB DAI 5230 Data and Status for the Process Image 124
STB DAI 5230 Specifications 125

116 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DAI 5230 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 115 VAC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 2
I/O base and uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the top connector,
and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 pink identification stripe, indicating a digital AC input module
5 sensor 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 sensor 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 117

Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
This module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DAI 5230 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

118 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DAI 5230 module provide visual indications of the operating status of
the module and its two digital input channels. Their locations and meanings are described below.

Location
The four LEDs are located in a column on the top of the front bezel of the module, directly below
the model number:

31007720 08/2016 119

Digital Input Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic power Check power
or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
communications
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the power
is absent from the input channels when a watchdog time-out
occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

120 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DAI 5230 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the
top connector, and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types and
field wire types are described below, and some field wiring options are presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DAI 5230 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-, three-, or four-wire sensors that draw current up to:
 100 mA/channel at 30 degrees C
 50 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
The module has IEC type 1 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports sensor 1, and the bottom connector supports sensor 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 115 VAC sensor bus power (L) 115 VAC sensor bus power (L)
2 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 2
3 field power neutral (to the module) field power neutral (to the module)
4 field power neutral (to the module) field power neutral (to the module)
5 protective earth protective earth

31007720 08/2016 121

Digital Input Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two sensors connected to an STB DAI 5230 module:

1 115 VAC (L) to sensor 1 (top) and to sensor 2 (bottom)

2 input from sensor 1 (top) and from sensor 2 (bottom)
3 field power neutral from sensor 1
5 PE connection point for field device (top)

The four-wire sensor on the top connector has a PE connection that is tied to the PE connection
on the PDM base through pin 5.

122 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DAI 5230 is a two-channel module that handles digital input data from two 115 VAC field
sensors. Each channel is user-configurable for logic normal or logic reverse input polarity.

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on both input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure input polarity values independently for each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAI 5230 you The selected STB DAI 5230 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Input Polarity row further Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the polarity settings at the Notice that when you select the Input
module level, select the integer that Polarity value, the maxi/min values of the
appears in the Value column of the polarity range appear at the bottom of the
Input Polarity row and enter a module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new integer value for
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Input Polarity, the values associated with
channels have normal polarity and 3 the channels change.
means that both channels have For example, if you choose an input
reverse polarity. polarity value of 2, Channel 1 = 0 and
Channel 2 = 1.
4b To change the polarity settings at the When you accept a new integer value for
channel level, double click on the a channel setting, the value for the
channel value(s) you want to change, module in the Input Polarity row changes.
then select the desired setting(s) from For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
the pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Input Polarity value
changes to 2.

31007720 08/2016 123

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DAI 5230 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in one 16-bit register. The information can be read by the fieldbus
master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The specific registers used in the block are determined by
the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DAI 5230 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) in the represents the on/off state of input 1, and the bit to its immediate
left represents the on/off state of input 2:

124 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5230 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 115 VAC IEC type 1 (47 ... 63 Hz)

input
number of input channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
operating voltage range 74 to 132 VAC
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no — cannot be used as inputs to a
reflex action
input surge protection metal oxide varistor
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
nominal logic bus current consumption 40 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 0 mA, with no load
sensor bus power to field 100 mA @ 60 degrees C
sensor power limit 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C
current field 60 mA
input voltage on 74 ... 132 VAC
off 0 ... 20 VAC
input current on 4 mA min.
off 2 mA max.
absolute maximum input continuous 132 VAC
for one cycle 200 VAC
input response time on-to-off 1.5 line cycles
off-to-on 1.5 line cycles
polarity of the individual input default logic normal on both channels
channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by channel
settings1 logic normal, configurable by channel
field power requirement from a 115 VAC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C

31007720 08/2016 125

Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System

Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
1Requires the Advantys configuration software.

126 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

Section 2.8
STB DAI 5260 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel, isolated, IEC type 1)

STB DAI 5260 Digital 115 VAC Input Module (two-channel,

isolated, IEC type 1)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DAI 5260 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DAI 5260 Physical Description 128
STB DAI 5260 LED Indicators 130
STB DAI 5260 Field Wiring 132
STB DAI 5260 Functional Description 134
STB DAI 5260 Data for the Process Image 135
STB DAI 5260 Specifications 136

31007720 08/2016 127

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DAI 5260 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel isolated digital input module that
reads inputs from 115 VAC sensor devices. This module can receive power from different phases
of an AC power source. The module mounts in a size 2 I/O base and uses two five-terminal field
wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the top connector, and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom
connector.
The STB DAI 5260 module does not receive power from the PDM.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 pink identification stripe, indicating a digital AC input module
5 sensor 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 sensor 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

128 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DAI 5260 K), which includes:
 one STB DAI 5260 digital input module
 one size 2 STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 5-terminal screw type connectors
 two 5-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DAI 5260 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw clamp
connectors)

31007720 08/2016 129

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DAI 5260 module provide visual indications of the operating status of
the module and its two digital input channels. Their locations and meanings are described below.

Location
The four LEDs are located in a column on the top of the front bezel of the module, directly below
the model number:

130 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic power Check power
or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
communications
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the power
is absent from the input channels when a watchdog time-out
occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The module is not communicating with the If all Standard I/O
island bus. modules have the same
blink pattern, cycle
power to the island
and/or replace the NIM.
If the blink pattern
applies only to this
module, replace it.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

31007720 08/2016 131

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DAI 5260 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the
top connector, and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types and
field wire types are described below, and some field wiring options are presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DAI 5260 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire sensors.
The module has IEC type 1 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports sensor 1, and the bottom connector supports sensor 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 115 VAC source power 1 (to the 115 VAC source power 2 (to the module)
module)
2 sensor power 1 sensor power 2
3 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 2
4 field power neutral 1 (to the module) field power neutral 2 (to the module)
5 protective earth protective earth

132 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two sensors connected to an STB DAI 5260 module:

Within each connector, pins 1 and 2 are internally tied. The sensor on the top connector has a PE
connection that is tied to the PE connection on the PDM base through pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 133

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DAI 5260 is a two-channel module that handles digital input data from two 115 VAC field
sensors. Each channel is user-configurable for logic normal or logic reverse input polarity.

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on both input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure input polarity values independently for each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAI 5260 you The selected STB DAI 5260 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Input Polarity row further Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the polarity settings at the Notice that when you select the Input
module level, select the integer that Polarity value, the maxi/min values of the
appears in the Value column of the polarity range appear at the bottom of the
Input Polarity row and enter a module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new integer value for
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Input Polarity, the values associated with
channels have normal polarity and 3 the channels change.
means that both channels have For example, if you choose an input
reverse polarity. polarity value of 2, Channel 1 = 0 and
Channel 2 = 1.
4b To change the polarity settings at the When you accept a new integer value for
channel level, double click on the a channel setting, the value for the
channel value(s) you want to change, module in the Input Polarity row changes.
then select the desired setting(s) from For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
the pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Input Polarity value
changes to 2.

134 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DAI 5260 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in one 16-bit register. The information can be read by the fieldbus
master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 registers (in the range 45392 through
49487) reserved in the NIM’s memory. The specific registers used in the block are determined by
the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DAI 5260 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) in the represents the on/off state of input 1, and the bit to its immediate
left represents the on/off state of input 2:

31007720 08/2016 135

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 5260 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 115 VAC IEC type 1 (47 ... 63 Hz)

input
number of input channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
operating voltage range 74 to 132 VAC
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no — cannot be used as inputs to a
reflex action
prioritization supported yes
input surge protection metal oxide varistor
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
input-to-input 1780 VAC for 1 min
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
input voltage on 74 ... 132 VAC
off 0 ... 20 VAC
input current on 4 mA min.
off 2 mA max.
absolute maximum input continuous 132 VAC
for one cycle 200 VAC
input response time on-to-off 1.5 line cycles
off-to-on 1.5 line cycles
polarity of the individual input default logic normal on both channels
channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by channel
settings1 logic normal, configurable by channel
field power requirement from a 115 VAC field source
power protection 0.5A external fuse required (e.g.
Wickmann 1910500000)
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C

136 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to Advantys STB System

Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
1Requires the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 137

Digital Input Modules

Section 2.9
STB DAI 7220 Digital 230 VAC Input Module (two-channel, three-wire, IEC type 1)

STB DAI 7220 Digital 230 VAC Input Module (two-channel,

three-wire, IEC type 1)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DAI 7220 digital input
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DAI 7220 Physical Description 139
STB DAI 7220 LED Indicators 141
STB DAI 7220 Field Wiring 143
STB DAI 7220 Functional Description 145
STB DAI 7220 Data for the Process Image 146
STB DAI 7220 Specifications 147

138 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DAI 7220 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital input module that reads inputs
from 230 VAC sensor devices and provides power to the sensors. The module mounts in a size 2
I/O base and uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the top connector,
and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 pink identification stripe, indicating a digital AC input module
5 sensor 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 sensor 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 139

Digital Input Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DAI 7220 digital input module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

140 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DAI 7220 module are visual indicators of the operating status of the
module and its two digital input channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DAI 7220 digital input module.
The figure below shows their location:

31007720 08/2016 141

Digital Input Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR IN1 IN2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on input channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on input channel 1.
on Voltage is present on input channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on input channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
Note that the green input LEDs will be on even though the power communications
is absent from the input channels when a watchdog time-out
occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.

142 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DAI 7220 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Sensor 1 is wired to the
top connector, and sensor 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types and
field wire types are described below, and a field wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Sensors
The STB DAI 7220 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-, three-, or four-wire sensors that draw current up to:
 100 mA/channel at 30 degrees C
 50 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
The module has IEC type 1 inputs that support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices
such as relay contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 143

Digital Input Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital input channel 1, and the bottom connector supports digital input
channel 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 230 VAC sensor bus power (L1) 230 VAC sensor bus power (L1)
2 input from sensor 1 input from sensor 2
3 field power neutral or L2 (to the module) field power neutral or L2 (to the module)
4 field power neutral or L2 (to the module) field power neutral or L2 (to the module)
5 protective earth protective earth

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two sensors connected to an STB DAI 7220 module:

1 230 VAC (L1) to sensor 1 (top) and to sensor 2 (bottom)

2 input from sensor 1 (top) and from sensor 2 (bottom)
3 field power neutral or L2 from sensor 1
5 PE connection point for sensor 1 (top)

The four-wire sensor on the top connector has a PE connection that is tied to the PE connection
on the PDM base through pin 5.

144 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DAI 7220 module is a two-channel module that handles digital input data from two
230 VAC field sensors. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize each
channel for logic normal or logic reverse input polarity.

Input Polarity
By default, the polarity on both input channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
The input polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 1 indicates that the physical sensor is off (or the input signal is low)
 0 indicates that the physical sensor is on (or the input signal is high)
To change an input polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure input polarity values independently for each input channel:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAI 7220 you The selected STB DAI 7220 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Input Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Input Polarity row further Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the polarity settings at the When you select the Input Polarity value,
module level, select the integer that the maxi/min values of the polarity range
appears in the Value column of the appear at the bottom of the module editor
Input Polarity row and enter a screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new integer value for
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Input Polarity, the values associated with
channels have normal polarity and 3 the channels change.
means that both channels have For example, if you choose an input
reverse polarity. polarity value of 2, Channel 1 = 0 and
Channel 2 = 1.
4b To change the polarity settings at the When you accept a new integer value for
channel level, double click on the a channel setting, the value for the
channel value(s) you want to change, module in the Input Polarity row changes.
then select the desired setting(s) from For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
the pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Input Polarity value
changes to 2.

31007720 08/2016 145

Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Input Data

The STB DAI 7220 sends a representation of the operating state of its input channels to the NIM.
The NIM stores this information in one 16-bit register.The information can be read by the fieldbus
master or, if you are not using a basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The input data process image is part of a block of 4096 reserved registers (in the range 45392
through 49487) in the NIM’s memory. The specific registers used in the block are determined by
the module’s physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transmitted to the master in a fieldbus-
specific format. For fieldbus-specific format descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB Network
Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported fieldbus,

Input Data Register

The first STB DAI 7220 register in the input block of the process image is the data register. The
least significant bit (LSB) in the register represents the on/off state of input 1, and the bit to its
immediate left represents the on/off state of input 2:

146 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Input Modules

STB DAI 7220 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 230 VAC IEC type 1 (47 ... 63 Hz) input

number of input channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
operating voltage range 159 to 265 VAC
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no — cannot be used as inputs to a reflex
action
input surge protection metal oxide varistor
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
logic bus current consumption 40 mA
nominal sensor bus current consumption 0 mA, with no load
sensor bus power to field 200 mA @60 degrees C
sensor power limit 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C
input voltage on +159 ... 265 VAC
off 0 ... 40 VAC
input current on 4 mA min.
off 2 mA max.
absolute maximum input continuous 265 VAC
for one cycle 400 VAC
input response time on-to-off 1.5 line cycles
off-to-on 1.5 line cycles
polarity of the individual input default logic normal on both channels
channels
user-configurable logic reversed, configurable by channel
settings1 logic normal, configurable by channel
field power requirements from a 230 VAC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C

31007720 08/2016 147

Digital Input Modules

agency certifications refer to Advantys STB System Planning and

Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

148 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Digital Output Modules
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 3
The Advantys STB Digital Output Modules

The Advantys STB Digital Output Modules

Overview
This chapter describes the features of the standard and basic Advantys STB digital output
modules.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
3.1 STB DDO 3200 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel, 0.5 A, 150
over-current protected)
3.2 STB DDO 3230 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel, 2.0 A, 165
over-current protected)
3.3 STB DDO 3410 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel, 0.5 A, 183
over-current protected)
3.4 STB DDO 3415 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel, 0.25 A, 200
over-current protected)
3.5 STB DDO 3600 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel, 0.5 A, 211
over-current protected)
3.6 STB DDO 3605 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel, 0.25 A, 228
over-current protected)
3.7 STB DDO 3705 High Density Output Module 239
3.8 STB DAO 5260 Digital 115 VAC Source, Isolated Output Module (two- 253
channel, 2 A)
3.9 STB DAO 8210 Digital 115/230 VAC Source Output Module (two-channel, 268
2 A)

31007720 08/2016 149

Digital Output Modules

Section 3.1
STB DDO 3200 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3200 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-

channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3200 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3200 Physical Description 151
STB DDO 3200 LED Indicators 153
STB DDO 3200 Field Wiring 155
STB DDO 3200 Functional Description 157
STB DDO 3200 Data and Status for the Process Image 161
STB DDO 3200 Specifications 163

150 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3200 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a
size 1 I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to the top
connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuator 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 151

Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DDO 3200 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

152 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 LED Indicators

Overview
The four LEDs on the STB DDO 3200 module provide visual indications of the operating status of
the module and its two digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are
described below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the module directly below the model
number. The figure below shows their locations:

31007720 08/2016 153

Digital Output Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the power the communications
is absent from the output channels when a watchdog time-out
occurs.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational mode or
in its fallback state.
flicker* Field power absent or a short circuit Check power
detected at the actuator.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart
the communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
blink 3**** Some of the output channels are in
fallback and some are operational. This
condition can occur only if the module is
used in a reflex action.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

154 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3200 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to
the top connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types
and field wire types are described below, and a field wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3200 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two- or three-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors,
relays, alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to:
 100 mA/channel at 30 degrees C
 50 mA/channel at 60 degrees C
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

External Fusing
The STB DDO 3200 does not provide electronic over-current protection for the field power. To
achieve over-current protection, you should place external fuses in-line on pin 1 or 2.
If you do not use fuses, an over-current condition could damage the module and blow the 10 A fuse
in the PDM.
Use a 0.5 A, 250 V 5 x 20 mm time-lag fuse such as the Wickmann 1910500000.

31007720 08/2016 155

Digital Output Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports actuator 1, and the bottom connector supports actuator 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC from actuator bus for field +24 VDC from actuator bus for field
device accessories device accessories
2 +24 VDC from actuator bus for field +24 VDC from actuator bus for field
device accessories device accessories
3 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 2
4 field power return field power return
5 field power return field power return
6 field power return field power return

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two actuators connected to the STB DDO 3200 module:

1 +24 VDC for actuator 1

3 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)
4 field power return from actuator 1
6 field power return from actuator 2

156 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3200 is a two-channel module that sends digital output data to two 24 VDC field
actuators. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following operating
parameters:
 the module’s response to fault recovery
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Fault Recovery Responses

The module can detect a short circuit on the actuator bus, an overcurrent fault or a loss of PDM
power on an output channel when the channel is turned on. If a fault is detected on either channel,
the module will do one of the following:
 automatically latch off the channel, or
 automatically recover and resume operation on the channel when the fault is corrected
The factory default setting is latched off, where the module turns off an output channel that is on if
it detects a fault and keeps the channel off until you explicitly reset it.
If you want to set the module to auto-recover when the fault is corrected, you need to use the
Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3200 module The selected STB DDO 3200
you want to configure in the island editor. module opens in the software
module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value Two choices appear in the pull-down
column of the Fault Recovery Response menu—Latched Off and Auto
row, select the desired response mode. Recovery.

The fault recovery mode is set at the module level—you cannot configure one channel to latch off
and the other to auto-recover. Once the module is operational, an output channel on which a fault
has been detected will implement the specified recovery mode; the other healthy channel will
continue to operate.

31007720 08/2016 157

Digital Output Modules

Resetting a Latched-off Output

When an output channel has been latched off because of fault detection, it will not recover until two
things happen:
 the error has been corrected
 you explicitly reset the channel
To reset a latched-off output channel, you must send it a value of 0. The 0 value resets the channel
to a standard off condition and restores its ability to respond to control logic. You need to provide
the reset logic in your application program.

Auto-recovery
When the module is configured to auto-recover, a channel that has been turned off because of fault
detection will start operating again as soon as the fault is corrected. No user intervention is required
to reset the channels. If the fault was transient, the channel may reactivate itself without leaving
any history of the short circuit.

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal, where:
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 1indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 an output value of 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from logic normal or back to normal from logic reverse,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3200 you want The selected STB DDO 3200 module opens in
to configure in the island editor. the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row further by Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2 appear.
clicking on the + sign.
4a To change the settings at the module level, When you select the Output Polarity value, the
select the integer that appears in the Value max/min values of the range appear at the bottom
column of the Output Polarity row and enter a of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the range When you accept a new value for Output Polarity,
0 to 3, where 0 means both channels have the values associated with the channels change.
logic normal polarity, and 3 means that both For example, if you choose an output polarity
channels have logic reverse polarity. value of 2, Channel 1 has normal polarity and
Channel 2 has reverse polarity.

158 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change the settings at the channel level, When you accept a new value for a channel
double click on the channel values you want to setting, the value for the module in the Output
change, then select the desired settings from Polarity row changes.
the pull-down menu. For example, if you set channel 1 to logic normal,
and channel 2 to logic reverse, the Output Polarity
value changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
channel individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state (1) or hold last value (0). When
a channel has predefined (1) as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either
1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value (0) as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state
when communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both channels is a predefined state. To change the fallback mode
to hold last value, use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3200 module The selected STB DDO 3200 module opens in
you want to configure in the island editor. the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings fields by A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row further by Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2 appear.
clicking on the + sign.
4a To change the settings at the module level, When you select the Fallback Mode value, the
select the integer that appears in the Value max/min values of the range appear at the
column of the Fallback Mode row and enter a bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the range When you accept a new value for Fallback Mode,
0 to 3, where 0 means both channels hold the values associated with the channels change.
their last values and 3 means that both For example, if you configure a fallback mode
channels go to a predefined state. value of 2, Channel 1 is hold last value and
Channel 2 is predefined state.
4b To change the settings at the channel level, When you accept a new value for a channel
double click on the channel values you want to setting, the value for the module in the Fallback
change, then select the desired settings from Mode row changes.
the pull-down menu. For example, if you set channel 1 to hold last
value and channel 2 to predefined, the Fallback
Mode value changes to 2.

31007720 08/2016 159

Digital Output Modules

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, both channels are configured to go to 0 as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from hold last value, or to revert back to the default from a predefined
state, you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode value If the Fallback Mode value for the channel is
for the channel you want to configure is 1 0 (hold last value), any value entered in the
(predefined state). associated Predefined Fallback Value row
will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Value A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Settings fields by clicking on the + sign. appears.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Value Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2 appear.
row further by clicking on the + sign.
4a To change a setting at the module level, When you select the value associated with
select the integer that appears in the Predefined Fallback Value, the max/min
Value column of the Predefined Fallback values of the range appear at the bottom of
Value row and enter a hexadecimal or the module editor screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, where When you accept a new Predefined
0 means both channels have 0 as their Fallback Value, the values associated with
predefined fallback value and 3 means the channels change.
that both channels have 1 as their For example, suppose that the fallback
predefined fallback value. mode for both channels is predefined state
and the polarity setting for each channel is
logic normal. If you configure a value of 2 as
the Predefined Fallback Value, Channel 2
will have a fallback state of 1 (actuator on)
and Channel 1 will have fallback state of 0
(actuator off).
4b To change a setting at the channel level, When you accept a new value for a channel
double click on the channel values you setting, the value for the module in the
want to change, then select the desired Predefined Fallback Value row changes.
settings from the pull-down menu. You For example, if you configure channel 2 to a
can configure a fallback state of either 0 value of 1 and configure channel 1 to a
or 1 for each channel on the module. value of 0, the Predefined Fallback Value
value changes from 0 to 2.

160 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data and Status

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DDO 3200 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in this data block. The STB DDO 3200 uses one register in the output
data block.
The STB DDO 3200’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
two output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 161

Digital Output Modules

Echo and Status Registers

The echo output data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in
the range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the
data for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DDO 3200 is represented by two contiguous registers in this block—one register that
echoes the information in the output data register followed by one that displays the status of the
output channels.
The first STB DDO 3200 register in the I/O status block is the module’s echo output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DDO 3200 module:

Under normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica of the
bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register and
the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the channel
is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.
The next contiguous register is the STB DDO 3200’s status register. It indicates whether or not a
fault condition has been detected on either of the module’s two output channels. The fault might
be field power absent or actuator power shorted:

162 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3200 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.5 A source output

number of output channels two
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection per channel
short circuit feedback per channel
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM internal protection on the module
fault recovery response default channels latched off—requires user
reset
user-configurable auto-recovery
settings1 latched off
logic bus current consumption 50 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 1.216 A, with no load
maximum load current 0.5 A/channel
minimum load current none
output response time off-to-on 620 μs @ 0.5 A load
on-to-off 575 μs @ 0.5 A load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage
pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 5 A/channel @ 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF

31007720 08/2016 163

Digital Output Modules

maximum load inductance 0.5 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)
fallback mode default predefined fallback values on both
channels
user-configurable hold last value
settings predefined fallback value on one or
both channels
fallback states (when default both channels go to 0
predefined is the fallback user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
mode)
settings
polarity on individual default logic normal on both channels
outputs
user-configurable logic reverse on one or both channels
settings
logic normal on one or both channels
actuator bus power for accessories 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C
over-current protection for accessory power none
external fusing 0.5 A time-lag fuses on pin 1 or 2 for
accessory power over-current
protection
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

164 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Section 3.2
STB DDO 3230 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-channel, 2.0 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3230 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (two-

channel, 2.0 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3230 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.
This output module supports high-current actuators, and special field wiring capabilities are
provided. If your actuators require field power, the +24 VDC should be delivered by an independent
power supply connected directly to the actuator, not from the island’s actuator bus. The
implications of this alternative field wiring are described.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3230 Physical Description 166
STB DDO 3230 LED Indicators 168
STB DDO 3230 Field Wiring 170
STB DDO 3230 Functional Description 174
STB DDO 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image 179
STB DDO 3230 Specifications 181

31007720 08/2016 165

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3230 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices that draw current up to 2.0 A each. The module mounts in a
size 1 I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to the top
connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector.
Because the module supports field actuators with loads up to 2.0 A/channel, the module lets you
connect directly to an external 24 VDC power supply for field power instead of using a PDM. You
can also use the island’s actuator bus for field power. In either case, use the module in conjunction
with a 24 VDC PDM.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuator 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

166 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DDO 3230 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XST 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 167

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 LED Indicators

Overview
The four LEDs on the STB DDO 3230 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its two digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DDO 3230 digital output
module. The figure below shows their location:

168 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic power or Check power
has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart
the communications
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the power is
absent from the output channels when a watchdog time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational mode or
in its fallback state.
flicker* Field power absent or a short circuit detected at Check power
the actuator.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart
the communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
blink 3**** Some of the output channels are in fallback and
some are operational. This condition can occur
only if the module is used in a reflex action.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

31007720 08/2016 169

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3230 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to
the top connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types
and field wire types are described below, and some field wiring examples are presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3230 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two- or three-wire actuators. The actuators may be high-
power devices such as motor starters, valves or incandescent lamps that draw current up to
2.0 A/channel.
When field power is required for the actuators, the recommended procedure is to connect the field
devices to an external 24 VDC power supply.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

170 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

External Fusing
If you field-wire an STB DDO 3230 output module with an independent power supply instead of
through a PDM, the overcurrent protection provided by the PDM (see page 350) is lost. You must
provide external protection with a 2.5 A time-lag fuse (such as the Wickmann 1911250000).

WARNING
FIRE HAZARD
When an independent power supply is used, you must fuse each unprotected channel
independently.
 Install a fuse between the external power supply and pin 2 on the unprotected field wiring
connector(s).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports the actuator 1, and the bottom connector supports actuator 2. The
module may be field wired in either of two ways:
 so that the module delivers field power to the actuators from the PDM
 so that the actuators get field power from an independent power source
Use pin 1 if field power comes from the island’s actuator bus. Use pin 2 if an independent power
supply is used for the actuators:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC actuator bus power +24 VDC actuator bus power
2 independent power supply in independent power supply in
3 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 2
4 independent power supply return independent power supply return
5 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)
6 field power return (to the module) field power return (to the module)

NOTE: If you are using the island’s actuator bus for +24 VDC operating power:
 externally jumper pin 1 to pin 2
 externally jumper pin 4 to pin 5
 use pin 6 as the field power return from the actuators

If you are using an independent power supply, use pin 2 as the +24 VDC line and pin 4 as the return
line.

31007720 08/2016 171

Digital Output Modules

Sample Wiring Diagrams

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If you field-wire an STB DDO 3230 output module with an independent power supply instead of
through a PDM, the mechanism in the PDM that protects the actuators from miswiring is no longer
present.
 Make certain that you wire pins 2, 3 and 4 correctly as shown below.
A miswired field connection will cause the field actuator devices wired to this module to turn on
as soon as field power is applied, even if logic control is not present.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The following illustration shows two field actuators connected to the STB DDO 3230 module and
receiving field power from an independent 24 VDC power supply instead of the PDM:

2 +24 VDC from an independent power supply, with user-supplied external fuses (top and bottom)
3 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)
4 power supply return from actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)

172 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

The following field wiring example shows two two-wire actuators wired to the STB DDO 3230
module. These devices do not use field power from the actuator bus. The jumpers between pins 1
and 2 and between pins 4 and 5 are required:

1 +24 VDC field power from the PDM (top) jumpered to pin 2 (top and bottom)
2 jumpered to pin 1 (top and bottom)
3 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)
4/5 jumpered together (top and bottom)
6 field power return from actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)

31007720 08/2016 173

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3230 module is two-channel module that sends digital output data to two 24 VDC
field actuators. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following
operating parameters:
 the module’s response to fault recovery
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Fault Recovery Responses

The module can detect an overcurrent situation or a loss of PDM power on an output channel when
the channel is turned on. If a fault is detected on either channel, the module will do one of the
following:
 automatically latch off the channel, or
 automatically recover and resume operation on the channel when the fault is corrected
The factory default setting is latched off, where the module turns off an output channel that is on if
it detects a fault and keeps the channel off until you reset it explicitly.
If you want to set the module to auto-recover when the fault is corrected, you need to use the
Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3230 you want The selected STB DDO 3230
to configure in the island editor. module opens in the software
module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value Two choices appear in the pull-down
column of the Fault Recovery Response menu—Latched Off and Auto
row, select the desired response mode. Recovery.

The fault recovery mode is set at the module level—you cannot configure one channel to latch off
and the other to auto-recover. Once the module is operational, an output channel on which a fault
has been detected will implement the specified recovery mode; the other healthy channel will
continue to operate.

174 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Resetting a Latched-off Output

When an output channel has been latched off because of fault detection, it will not recover until two
things happen:
 the error has been corrected
 you explicitly reset the channel
To reset a latched off output channel, you must send it a value of 0. The 0 value resets the channel
to a standard off condition and restores its ability to respond to control logic. You need to provide
the reset logic in your application program.

Auto-recovery
When the module is configured to auto-recover, a channel that has been turned off because of a
short circuit will start operating again as soon as the fault is corrected. No user intervention is
required to reset the channels. If the fault was transient, the channel may reactivate itself without
leaving any history of the short circuit.

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal, where:
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 1indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 an output value of 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3230 you The selected STB DDO 3230 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

31007720 08/2016 175

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max./min. values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Output
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an output
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Output Polarity row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to
pull-down menu(s). normal polarity and channel 2 to reverse
polarity, the Output Polarity value
changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
individual channel. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined (1) or hold last value (0). When a
channel has predefined as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either 1 or
0. When a channel has hold last value as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state when
communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both channels is a predefined state (1). If you want to change the
fallback mode to hold last value (0), use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3230 you The selected STB DDO 3230 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

176 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max./min. values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for
where 0 means both channels hold Fallback Mode, the values associated
their last values and 3 means that both with the channels change.
channels go to a predefined state. For example, if you choose a fallback
mode value of 2, then Channel 1 goes to
hold last value and Channel 2 goes to a
predefined state.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Fallback Mode row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to hold
pull-down menu(s). last value and channel 2 to predefined,
the Fallback Mode value changes to 2.

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, both channels are configured to go to 0 as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its default setting or to revert back to the default from an on setting,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value for the channel
value for the channel you want to is 0 (hold last value), any value entered in
configure is 1 (predefined state). the associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
Value row further by clicking on the + appear.
sign.

31007720 08/2016 177

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Predefined max/min values of the range appear at
Fallback Value row and enter a the bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new Predefined
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Fallback Value, the values associated
channels have 0 as their predefined with the channels change.
fallback value and 3 means that both For example, if you choose a fallback
channels have 1 as their predefined state value of 2, then Channel 2 will turn
fallback value. on as its fallback state. Channel 1 will
either turn off or be ignored, depending on
its fallback mode setting.
4b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Predefined Fallback Value row
select the desired setting(s) from the changes.
pull-down menu(s). You can configure For example, if you set channel 2 to 1 and
a fallback state of either 0 or 1 for each leave channel 1 at 0, the Predefined
channel on the module. Fallback Value value changes from 0 to 2.

178 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data and Status

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DDO 3230 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in this data block. The STB DDO 3230 uses one register in the output
data block.
The STB DDO 3230’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
two output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 179

Digital Output Modules

Output Status Registers

The input data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the
range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the data
for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DDO 3230 is represented by two contiguous registers—one register that echoes the
output data register followed by one that displays the status of the output channels.
The first STB DDO 3230 register in the I/O status block is the module’s echo output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DDO 3200 module.

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the
channel is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.
The next contiguous register is the STB DDO 3230’s status register. It indicates whether or not a
fault condition has been detected on either of the module’s two output channels. The fault would
be either field power absent or actuator power shorted:

180 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3230 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 2.0 A source output

number of output channels two
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection per channel
short circuit feedback per channel
isolation voltage channel-to-channel 500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired internal protection on the module
PDM
fault recovery response default channel latched off—requires user reset
user-configurable auto-recovery
settings1 latched off
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 5.005 A, with no load
maximum load current 2.0 A/channel
minimum load current none
output response time off-to-on 520 μs
on-to-off 720 μs
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage pulse
on-state 0.4 VDC max.
drop/channel
off-state leakage/channel 1.0 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 10 A/channel for 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF

31007720 08/2016 181

Digital Output Modules

maximum load inductance

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable hold last value
settings1 predefined fallback value on one or both
channels
fallback states (when default both channels go to 0
predefined is the user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
fallback mode)
settings1
polarity on individual default logic normal on both channels
outputs user-configurable logic reverse on one or both channels
settings1 logic normal on one or both channels
field power field power voltage 19.2 to 30 VDC
requirements recommended external 24 VDC power supply
source
power protection recommendation: user-supplied 2.5 A
time-lag fuses externally applied to each
channel
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE
171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

182 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Section 3.3
STB DDO 3410 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3410 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-

channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3410 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3410 Physical Description 184
STB DDO 3410 LEDs 186
STB DDO 3410 Field Wiring 189
STB DDO 3410 Functional Description 191
STB DDO 3410 Data and Status for the Process Image 196
STB DDO 3410 Specifications 198

31007720 08/2016 183

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3410 is a standard Advantys STB four-channel digital input module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a
size 1 I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1and 2 are wired to the
top connector, and actuators 3 and 4 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuator 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

184 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DDO 3410 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clampp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 185

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 LEDs

Overview
The six LEDs on the STB DDO 3410 module are visual indicators of the operating status of the
module and its four digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The six LED are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DDO3410 digital output module.
The figure below shows their locations:

186 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the six LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not Check power
receiving logic power or has
failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of
the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence
tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output

channel 1.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 2.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 3.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 4.
on on on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the power is the communications
absent from the output channels when a watchdog time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-
operational mode or in its
fallback state.
flicker* Field power absent or a short Check power
circuit detected at the actuator.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been Cycle power, restart
detected. the communications

31007720 08/2016 187

Digital Output Modules

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Meaning What to Do

blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace
NIM
blink 3**** Some of the output channels are
in fallback and some are
operational. This condition can
occur only if the module is used
in a reflex action.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

188 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3410 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1 and 2 are
wired to the top connector, and actuators 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector. The choices
of connector types and field wire types are described below, and some field wiring options are
presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3410 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to four two-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors, relays,
alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to 0.5 A/channel.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

31007720 08/2016 189

Digital Output Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital output channels 1and 2; the bottom connector supports digital
output channels 3 and 4:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 3
2 field power return field power return
3 field power return field power return
4 output to actuator 2 output to actuator 4
5 field power return field power return
6 field power return field power return

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows four actuators connected to the STB DDO 3410 module:

1 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 3 (bottom)

2 field power return from actuator 1 (top)
3 field power return from actuator 3 (bottom)
4 output to actuator 2 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)
5 field power return from actuator 2 (top)
6 field power return from actuator 4 (bottom)

190 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3410 module is a four-channel module that sends digital output data to four 24 VDC
field actuators. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following
operating parameters:
 the module’s response to fault recovery
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Fault Recovery Responses

The module can detect a short circuit on the actuator bus, an overcurrent fault or a PDM power
failure on an output channel when the channel is turned on. If a fault is detected on any channel,
the module will do one of the following:
 automatically latch off that channel plus another channel with which that channel is grouped, if
that other channel is on, or
 automatically recover and resume operation on the channel group when the fault is corrected
The factory default setting is latched off, where the module turns off the output channels in a group
when a short circuit or overcurrent condition is detected on any channel in that group. The channels
will remain off until you explicitly reset them.
If you want to set the module to auto-recover when the fault is corrected, you need to use the
Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3410 you want The selected STB DDO 3410
to configure in the island editor. module opens in the software
module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value Two choices appear in the pull-down
column of the Fault Recovery Response menu—Latched Off and Auto
row, select the desired response mode. Recovery.

The fault recovery parameter is set at the module level—you cannot configure one group of
channels to latch off and another to auto-recover. The module will apply the fault recovery
response the channels in two groups (two channels/group):
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises output channels 3 and 4
For example, suppose the module is configured to latch off a shorted output channel. If a short
circuit occurs on output channel 1, both group 1 channels (output 1 and output 2) are latched off.
Channels 1 and 2 remain latched off until they are reset, and channels 3 and 4 continue to operate.

31007720 08/2016 191

Digital Output Modules

Resetting a Latched-off Output

When an output channel (or channel group) has been latched off because of fault detection, it will
not recover until two things happen:
 the error has been corrected
 you explicitly reset the channel
To reset a latched off output channel, send a value of 0 to both channels in the latched-off group.
The 0 value resets the channels to a standard off condition and restores their ability to respond to
control logic. You need to provide the reset logic in your application program.

Auto-recovery
When the module is configured to auto-recover, a channel group that has been turned off because
of a short circuit will start operating again as soon as the faulty channel is corrected. No user
intervention is required to reset the channels. If the fault was transient, the channels may reactivate
themselves without leaving any history of the short circuit.

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on all four output channels is logic normal, where:
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 1 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or more channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 an output value of 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from logic normal, or back to normal from logic reverse,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3410 you The selected STB DDO 3410 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
4 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
further by clicking on the + sign. 3 and Channel 4 appear.

192 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

5a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 15 (0 When you accept a new value for Output
to 0xF), where 0 means all channels Polarity, the values associated with the
have normal polarity and 0xF means channels change.
that all four channels have reverse For example, if you choose an output
polarity. polarity value of 6, Channel 1 and
Channel 4 will have normal polarity while
Channel 2 and Channel 3 will have
reverse polarity.
5b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Output Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channels 1 and 4
menu. to normal polarity and channels 2 and 3 to
reverse polarity, the Output Polarity value
changes to 6.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
channel individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state (1) or hold last value (0). When
a channel has predefined state as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state,
either 1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value as its fallback mode, it remains in its last known
state when communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for all four channels is a predefined state. To change the fallback
mode to hold last value, use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3410 you The selected STB DDO 3410 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.

31007720 08/2016 193

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
further by clicking on the + sign. 3 and Channel 4 appear.
5a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 15 When you accept a new value for
(0 to 0xF), where 0 means all four Fallback Mode, the values associated
channels hold their last values and 0xF with the channels change.
means that all four channels go to a For example, if you choose a fallback
predefined state. mode value of 6, Channel 1 and
Channel 4 will be configured to hold last
value, while Channel 2 and Channel 3 will
be configured to predefined state.
5b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Fallback Mode row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 2 to hold
menu. last value, and leave the remaining
channels in their predefined state, the
Fallback Mode value changes to 0xD.

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, all four channels are configured to go to a predefined state (1) as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its predefined state, or to revert back tonormal from an on setting,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value for the channel
value for the channel you want to is 0 (hold last value), any value entered in
configure is 1 (predefined state). the associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.

194 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
4 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
Value row further by clicking on the + 3 and Channel 4 appear.
sign.
5a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Predefined max/min values of the range appear at
Fallback Value row and enter a the bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new Predefined
range 0 to 15 (0 to 0xF), where 0 Fallback Value, the values associated
means both channels have 0 as their with the channels change.
predefined fallback value and 15 For example, if you choose a fallback
means that all channels have 1 as their state value of 6, Channel 1 and Channel 4
predefined fallback value. will be 0, while Channel 2 and Channel 3
will be 1.
5b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Predefined Fallback Value row
the desired settings from the pull-down changes.
men. You can configure a fallback state For example, if you set channels 1 and 4
of either 0 or 1 for each channel on the to a value of 0, and set channels 2 and 3
module. to 1, the Predefined Fallback Value
changes to 6.

31007720 08/2016 195

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data and Status

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DDO 3410 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in this data block. The STB DDO 3410 uses one register in the output
data block.
The STB DDO 3410’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
four output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

Output Status Registers

The input data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the
range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the data
for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DDO 3410 is represented by two contiguous registers—one register that echoes the
output data register followed by one that displays the status of the output channels.

196 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

The first STB DDO 3410 register in the I/O status block is the module’s echo output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DDO 3410 module:

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the
channel is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.
The next contiguous register is the STB DDO 3410’s status register. It indicates whether or not a
fault condition has been detected on any of the module’s four output channels.The fault might be
field power absent or actuator power shorted:

Group 1 comprises outputs 1 and 2. Group 2 comprises outputs 3 and 4.

31007720 08/2016 197

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3410 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.5 A source output

number of output channels four
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum 1
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection per channel
short circuit feedback per group: group 1 comprises channels
1 and 2; group 2 comprises channels 3
and 4
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM internal protection on the module
fault recovery default channel latched off; requires off-on
response command to reset
user-configurable auto-recovery
settings1 latched off
logic bus current consumption 70 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 2.01 A, with no load
maximum load current 0.5 A/channel
minimum load current none
output response time off-to-on 560 μs @ 0.5 A load
on-to-off 870 μs @ 0.5 A load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage
pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 5 A/channel for 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF

198 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

maximum load inductance 0.5 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable hold last value
settings1 predefined fallback value on one or
more channels
fallback states (when default both channels go to 0
predefined is the user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
fallback mode)
settings1
polarity on individual default logic normal on all four channels
outputs
user-configurable logic reverse on one or more channels
settings1 logic normal on one or more channels
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
operating voltage range*** 19.2 to 30 VDC
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 199

Digital Output Modules

Section 3.4
STB DDO 3415 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-channel, 0.25 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3415 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (four-

channel, 0.25 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3415 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3415 Physical Description 201
STB DDO 3415 LEDs 203
STB DDO 3415 Field Wiring 205
STB DDO 3415 Functional Description 207
STB DDO 3415 Data for the Process Image 208
STB DDO 3415 Specifications 209

200 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3415 is a basic Advantys STB four-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a
size 1 I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1and 2 are wired to the
top connector, and actuators 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuators 1 and 2 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 3 and 4 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 201

Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DDO 3415 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

202 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 LEDs

Overview
The five LEDs on the STB DDO 3415 module are visual indicators of the operating status of the
module and its four digital output channels.

Location
The LEDs are located on the front bezel of the module below the model number:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the pattern
on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Meaning

off The module is either not receiving logic
power, has experienced a watchdog
timer error or has failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in progress.

31007720 08/2016 203

Digital Output Modules

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Meaning

on The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on Voltage is present on output channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 3.
on Voltage is present on output channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 4.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until
the causal condition changes.

204 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3415 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1 and 2 are
wired to the top connector, and actuators 3 and 4 are wired to the bottom connector.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3415 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to four two-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors, relays,
alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to 250 mA/channel.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital output channels 1and 2; the bottom connector supports digital
output channels 3 and 4:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 3
2 field power return field power return
3 field power return field power return
4 output to actuator 2 output to actuator 4
5 field power return field power return
6 field power return field power return

31007720 08/2016 205

Digital Output Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows four actuators connected to the STB DDO 3415 module:

1 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 3 (bottom)

2 field power return from actuator 1 (top)
3 field power return from actuator 3 (bottom)
4 output to actuator 2 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)
5 field power return from actuator 2 (top)
6 field power return from actuator 4 (bottom)

206 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3415 module is a four-channel module that sends digital output data to four 24 VDC
field actuators. It does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex actions.

Auto-recovery from Detected Faults

If an overcurrent fault is detected on any channel, that channel plus the one with which it is grouped
turns off. The module applies the fault recovery response to the channels in two groups:
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises output channels 3 and 4
A channel group that has been turned off because of a short circuit will start operating automatically
as soon as the faulty channel is corrected. No user intervention is required to reset the channels.

Fallback States
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. All four channels go to a predefined fallback
state of 0 VDC.

31007720 08/2016 207

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image. Information
in the output data block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output
modules. This information can be monitored by the fieldbus master. If you are not using a basic
NIM, the information may also be monitored by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. An STB DDO 3415 uses
one register in the output data block. The specific register is based on its physical location on the
island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The STB DDO 3415’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
four output channels:

208 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3415 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.25 A source output

number of output channels four
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection no
fault recovery per group:
 group 1 comprises channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises channels 3 and 4

isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min

reverse polarity protection from a miswired internal protection on the module
PDM
fault recovery response auto-recovery
logic bus current consumption 70 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 1.01 A, with no load
maximum load current 0.25 A/channel
minimum load current none
output response off-to-on 560 μs @ 0.25 A load
time
on-to-off 870 μs @ 0.25 A load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 2.5 A/channel for 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF
maximum load inductance 0.5 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)

31007720 08/2016 209

Digital Output Modules

fallback mode predefined

fallback states both channels go to 0
output polarity logic normal on all four channels
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning
and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.

210 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Section 3.5
STB DDO 3600 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3600 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-

channel, 0.5 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3600 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3600 Physical Description 212
STB DDO 3600 LED Indicators 214
STB DDO 3600 Field Wiring 217
STB DDO 3600 Functional Description 219
STB DDO 3600 Data and Status for the Process Image 224
STB DDO 3600 Specifications 226

31007720 08/2016 211

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3600 is a standard Advantys STB six-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a
size 1 I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1, 2 and 3 are wired to
the top connector, and actuators 4, 5 and 6 are wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuators 1 ... 3 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 4 ... 6 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

212 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDO 3600 K), which includes:
 one STB DDO 3600 digital output module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDO 3600 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 213

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 LED Indicators

Overview
The eight LEDs on the STB DDO 3600 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its six digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The eight LED indicators are positioned in a column at the top front of the STB DDO 3600 digital
output module. The figure below shows their location:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the eight LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Meaning What to Do
off off The module is either Check power
not receiving logic
power or has failed.

214 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Meaning What to Do
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in
progress.
on off The module has
achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its
confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on
output channel 1.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on
output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 2.
on Voltage is present on
output channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 3.
on Voltage is present on
output channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 4.
on Voltage is present on
output channel 5.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 5.
on Voltage is present on
output channel 6.
off Voltage is absent on
output channel 6.
on on on on on on on on The watchdog has Cycle power,
timed out. restart the
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the power is communications
absent from the output channels when a watchdog time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in
pre-operational mode
or in its fallback state.

31007720 08/2016 215

Digital Output Modules

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Meaning What to Do
flicker* Field power absent or a Check power
short circuit detected at
the actuator.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has Cycle power,
been detected. restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not Check network
running. connections,
replace NIM
blink 3**** Some of the output
channels are in fallback
and some are
operational. This
condition can occur
only if the module is
used in a reflex action.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

216 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3600 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1, 2 and 3 are
wired to the top connector, and actuators 4, 5 and 6 are wired to the bottom connector. The choices
of connector types and field wire types are described below, and some field wiring options are
presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 20 (model
STB XTS 2100)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3600 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors, relays,
alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to 0.5 A/channel.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

31007720 08/2016 217

Digital Output Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital input channels 1, 2, and 3; the bottom connector supports digital
input channels 4, 5, and 6:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 4
2 field power return field power return
3 output to actuator 2 output to actuator 5
4 field power return field power return
5 output to actuator 3 output to actuator 6
6 field power return field power return

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows six actuators connected to the STB DDO 3600 module:

1 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)

2 field power return from actuator 1 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)
3 output to actuator 2 (top) and actuator 5 (bottom)
4 field power return from actuator 2 (top) and actuator 5 (bottom)
5 output to actuator 3 (top) and actuator 6 (bottom)
6 field power return from actuator 3 (top) and actuator 6 (bottom)

218 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3600 is a six-channel module that sends digital output data to six 24 VDC field
actuators. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize the following operating
parameters:
 the module’s response to fault recovery
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Fault Recovery Responses

The module can detect a short circuit on the actuator bus, an overcurrent fault or a loss of PDM
power on an output channel when the channel is turned on. If a fault is detected on any channel,
the module will do one of the following:
 automatically latch off that channel plus another channel with which that channel is grouped, if
that other channel is on, or
 automatically recover and resume operation on the channel group when the fault is corrected
The factory default setting is latched off, where the module turns off the output channels in a group
when a short circuit or overcurrent condition is detected on any channel in that group. The channels
will remain off until you reset them explicitly.
If you want to set the module to auto-recover when the fault is corrected, you need to use the
Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3600 module The selected STB DDO 3600
you want to configure in the island editor. module opens in the software
module editor.
2 From the pull-down menu in the Value Two choices appear in the pull-down
column of the Fault Recovery Response menu—Latched Off and Auto
row, select the desired response mode. Recovery.

The fault recovery parameter is set at the module level—you cannot configure one group of
channels to latch off and another to auto-recover. The module will apply the fault recovery
response the channels in three groups (two channels/group):
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises output channels 3 and 4
 group 3 comprises output channels 5 and 6
For example, suppose the module is configured to latch off a shorted output channel. If a short
circuit occurs on output channel 1, both group 1 channels (output 1 and output 2) are latched off.
Channels 1 and 2 remain latched off until they are reset, and channels 3 through 6 continue to
operate.

31007720 08/2016 219

Digital Output Modules

Resetting a Latched-off Output

When an output channel (or channel group) has been latched off because of fault detection, it will
not recover until two things happen:
 the error has been corrected
 you explicitly reset the channel
To reset a latched off output channel, send a value of 0 to both channels in the latched-off group.
The 0 value resets the channels to a standard off condition and restores their ability to respond to
control logic. You need to provide the reset logic in your application program.

Auto-recovery
When the module is configured to auto-recover, a channel group that has been turned off because
of a short circuit will start operating again as soon as the faulty channel is corrected. No user
intervention is required to reset the channels. If the fault was transient, the channels may reactivate
themselves without leaving any history of the short circuit having occurred.

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on all six output channels is logic normal, where:
 a output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 1indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or more channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 an output value of 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 an output value of 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from logic normal, or back to normal from logic reverse,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3600 The selected STB DDO 3600 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
4 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
further by clicking on the + sign. 3, Channel 4, Channel 5 and Channel 6
appear.

220 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

5a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 63 (0 When you accept a new value for Output
to 0x3F), where 0 means all channels Polarity, the values associated with the
have normal polarity and 0x3F means channels change.
that all six channels have reverse For example, if you choose an output
polarity. polarity value of 0x2F, Channel 5 will
have normal polarity and the other five
channels will have reverse polarity.
5b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Output Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channels 2 and 3
menu. to reverse polarity, and leave the other
four channels set to normal polarity, the
Output Polarity value changes to 0x6.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
channel individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state or hold last value. When a
channel has predefined state as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either
1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value (0) as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state
when communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for all six channels is a predefined state (1). If you want to change
the fallback mode to hold last value (0), use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DDO 3600 The selected STB DDO 3600 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.

31007720 08/2016 221

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
further by clicking on the + sign. 3, Channel 4, Channel 5 and Channel 6
appear.
5a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 63 When you accept a new value for
(0 to 0x3F), where 0 means all six Fallback Mode, the values associated
channels hold their last values and with the channels change. For example, if
0x3F means that all six channels go to you choose a fallback mode value of
a predefined state. 0x2F, Channel 5 will be set to hold last
value and the other five channels will be
set to predefined state.
5b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Fallback Mode row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 5 to hold
menu. last value, and leave the other five
channels set to predefined state, the
Fallback Mode value changes to 0x2F.

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, all four channels are instructed to go to hold last value (0) as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its default setting or to revert back to the default from an on setting,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value for the channel
value for the channel you want to is 0 (hold last value), any value entered in
configure is 1 (predefined state). the associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.

222 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

2 Choose the data display format by Hexadecimal values will appear in the
either checking or unchecking the editor if the box is checked; decimal
Hexadecimal checkbox at the top right values will appear if the box is unchecked.
of the editor.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
4 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
Value row further by clicking on the + 3, Channel 4, Channel 5 and Channel 6
sign. appear.
5a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Predefined max/min values of the range appear at
Fallback Value row and enter a the bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new Predefined
range 0 to 63 (0 to 0x3F), where 0 Fallback Value, the values associated
means all six channels have 0 as their with the channels change.
predefined fallback value and 0x3F For example, if you choose a fallback
means that all six channels have 1 as state value of 0x2F, Channel 5 will have a
their predefined fallback value. value of 0 (off) and the other five channels
will have 1 (on) as their value.
5b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Predefined Fallback Value row
the desired settings from the pull-down changes.
menu. You can configure a fallback For example, if you set channel 5 to 0 and
state of either 0 or 1 for each channel leave the other five channels set to 1, the
on the module. Predefined Fallback Value value changes
to 0x2F.

31007720 08/2016 223

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data and Status

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master ad is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DDO 3600 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in a register in this data block. The STB DDO 3600 uses one register
in the output data block.
The STB DDO 3600’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
six output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

224 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Output Status Registers

The echo output data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in
the range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the
data for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DDO 3600 is represented by two contiguous registers—one register that echoes the
output data register followed by one that displays the status of the output channels.
The first STB DDO 3600 register in the I/O status block is the module’s echo output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DDO 3600 module.

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the
channel is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.
The next contiguous register is the STB DDO 3600’s status register. It indicates whether or not a
fault condition has been detected on either of the module’s two output channels. The fault might
be field power absent or actuator power shorted:

Group 1 comprises outputs 1 and 2. Group 2 comprises outputs 3 and 4. Group 3 comprises
outputs 5 and 6.

31007720 08/2016 225

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3600 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.5 A source output

number of output channels six
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping* supported NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection per channel
short circuit feedback per group:
 group 1 comprises channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises channels 3 and 4
 group 3 comprises channels 5 and 6

fault recovery default setting shorted channel latched off—requires

response user reset action
user-configurable auto-recovery
settings1 latched off
isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM internal protection on the module
logic bus current consumption 90 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 3.015 A, with no load
maximum load current 0.5 A/channel
minimum load current none
output response time off-to-on 715 μs @ 0.5 A load
on-to-off 955 μs @ 0.5 A load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage
pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 5 A/channel for 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF

226 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

maximum load inductance 0.5 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)
fallback mode default predefined fallback values on all six
channels
user-configurable hold last value
settings1 predefined fallback value on one or
more channels
fallback states (when default all six channels go to 0
predefined is the user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
fallback mode)
settings1
polarity on individual default logic normal on all six channels
outputs
user-configurable logic reverse on one or more channels
settings1 logic normal on one or more channels
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range*** 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not let you hot swap I/O modules.
***This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1Requires the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 227

Digital Output Modules

Section 3.6
STB DDO 3605 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-channel, 0.25 A, over-current protected)

STB DDO 3605 Digital 24 VDC Source Output Module (six-

channel, 0.25 A, over-current protected)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DDO 3605 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3605 Physical Description 229
STB DDO 3605 LED Indicators 231
STB DDO 3605 Field Wiring 233
STB DDO 3605 Functional Description 235
STB DDO 3605 Data for the Process Image 236
STB DDO 3605 Specifications 237

228 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3605 is a basic Advantys STB six-channel digital output module that writes outputs
to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a size 1
I/O base and uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1, 2 and 3 are wired to the
top connector, and actuators 4, 5 and 6 are wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 actuators 1 ... 3 connect to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 4 ... 6 connect to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 229

Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DDO 3605 K), which includes:
 one STB DDO 3605 digital output module
 one size 1 STB XBA 1000 (see page 367) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 6-terminal screw type connectors
 two 6-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDO 3605 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 1000 size 1 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1100) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2100)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 13.9 mm (0.58 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.3 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 64.1 mm (2.52 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

230 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 LED Indicators

Overview
The seven LEDs on the STB DDO 3605 module are visual indications of the operating status of
the module and its six digital output channels.

Location
The LED indicators are positioned in a column at the top front of the STB DDO 3605 digital output
module:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the eight LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Meaning

off The module is either not receiving logic
power, has experienced a watchdog
timer error or has failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in progress.

31007720 08/2016 231

Digital Output Modules

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Meaning

on The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on Voltage is present on output channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 3.
on Voltage is present on output channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 4.
on Voltage is present on output channel 5.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 5.
on Voltage is present on output channel 6.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 6.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.

232 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3605 module uses two six-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1, 2 and 3 are
wired to the top connector, and actuators 4, 5 and 6 are wired to the bottom connector.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors, available in a kit of 20 (model
STB XTS 2100)
These field wiring connectors each have six connection terminals, with a 3.8 mm (0.15 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3605 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors, relays,
alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to 250 mA/channel.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports digital input channels 1, 2, and 3; the bottom connector supports digital
input channels 4, 5, and 6:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 4
2 field power return field power return
3 output to actuator 2 output to actuator 5
4 field power return field power return
5 output to actuator 3 output to actuator 6
6 field power return field power return

31007720 08/2016 233

Digital Output Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows six actuators connected to the STB DDO 3605 module:

1 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)

2 field power return from actuator 1 (top) and actuator 4 (bottom)
3 output to actuator 2 (top) and actuator 5 (bottom)
4 field power return from actuator 2 (top) and actuator 5 (bottom)
5 output to actuator 3 (top) and actuator 6 (bottom)
6 field power return from actuator 3 (top) and actuator 6 (bottom)

234 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3605 is a six-channel module that sends digital output data to six 24 VDC field
actuators. It does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex actions.

Auto-recovery from Detected Faults

If an overcurrent fault is detected on any channel, that channel plus the one with which it is grouped
turns off. The module applies the fault recovery response to the channels in three groups:
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises output channels 3 and 4
 group 3 comprises output channels 5 and 6
A channel group that has been turned off because of a short circuit will start operating again as
soon as the faulty channel is corrected. No user intervention is required to reset the channels.

Output Polarity
The polarity on all four output channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)

Fallback States
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. All six channels go to a predefined fallback
state of 0 VDC.

31007720 08/2016 235

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image. Information
in the output data block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master ad is used to update the output
module. If you are not using a basic NIM, the information may also be monitored by an HMI panel
connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. The STB DDO 3605 uses
one register in the output data block. The specific register is based on its physical location on the
island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The STB DDO 3605’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
six output channels:

236 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3605 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.25 A source output

number of output channels six
module width 13.9 mm (0.58 in)
I/O base STB XBA 1000 (see page 367)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
output protection (internal) transient voltage suppression
short circuit protection no
fault recovery per group:
 group 1 comprises channels 1 and 2
 group 2 comprises channels 3 and 4
 group 3 comprises channels 5 and 6

fault recovery response auto-recovery

isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired internal protection on the module
PDM
logic bus current consumption 90 mA
nominal island bus current consumption 1.515 A, with no load
maximum load current 250 mA/channel
minimum load current none
output response off-to-on 550 μs @ 250 mA resistive load
time
on-to-off 900 μs @ 250 mA resistive load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 56 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current 2.5 A/channel for 500 μs (no more than
six/min)
maximum load capacitance 50 μF

31007720 08/2016 237

Digital Output Modules

maximum load inductance 0.5 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)
fallback mode predefined fallback values on all six channels
fallback states all six channels go to 0
polarity on individual outputs logic normal on all six channels
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature 0 to 60 °C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not let you hot swap I/O modules.

238 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Section 3.7
STB DDO 3705 High Density Output Module

STB DDO 3705 High Density Output Module

Introduction
The STB DDO 3705 - described below - is a basic Advantys STB sixteen-channel digital output
module

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DDO 3705 Physical Description 240
STB DDO 3705 LED Indicators 242
STB DDO 3705 Field Wiring 245
STB DDO 3705 Functional Description 249
STB DDO 3705 Data for the Process Image 250
STB DDO 3705 Specifications 251

31007720 08/2016 239

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DDO 3705 is a basic Advantys STB sixteen-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to 24 VDC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The module mounts in a
size 3 base and uses two 18-pin field wiring connectors. The connectors are positioned side-by-
side on the bezel; connector A (which supports output channels 1...8) is on the left, and connector
B (which supports output channels 9...16) is on the right.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a digital VDC output module
5 group 1 actuators (1 - 8) connect to the left field wiring connector (A)
6 group 2 actuators (9 - 16) connect to the right field wiring connector (B)

240 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered in either of two kits:
 STB DDO 3705 KS, which includes:
 one STB DDO 3705 digital output module
 one size 3 STB XBA 3000 (see page 375) I/O base
 two 18-terminal screw type connectors

 STB DDO 3705 KC, which includes:

 one STB DDO 3705 digital output module
 one size 3 STB XBA 3000 (see page 375) I/O base
 two 18-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DDO 3705 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 3000 size 3 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1180) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2180)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
 the STB XTS 5610 and STB XTS 6610 high density I/O connector interfaces (see page 389)
can replace the standard field wiring connectors and facilitate a Telefast connection
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

31007720 08/2016 241

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 LED Indicators

Overview
The seventeen LEDs on the STB DDO 3705 module are visual indicators of the module’s operating
status and its sixteen digital output channels.

Location
The LED indicators are positioned in two columns at the top of the STB DDO 3705 digital output
module’s bezel. Indicators for the RDY signal and output channels 1...8 are in the left column, and
output channels 9...16 in the right column.

Indicators
The following two-part table defines the meaning of the seventeen LEDs (where an empty cell
indicates that the pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter). The first part of the table
corresponds to the left column of LED indicators:

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 Meaning
off The module is either not receiving
logic power, has experienced a
watchdog timer error or has
failed.
flicker* Auto-addressing is in progress.
blink 1** The module is in pre-operational
mode and in its fallback state.

242 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

RDY OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 Meaning
on The module has achieved all of
the following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence
tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output

channel 1.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 2.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 3.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 3.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 4.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 4.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 5.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 5.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 6.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 6.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 7.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 7.
on Voltage is present on output
channel 8.
off Voltage is absent on output
channel 8.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms.

31007720 08/2016 243

Digital Output Modules

The second part of the table describes combinations of the RDY indicator in the left column plus
the right column LED indicators:

RDY OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 Meaning
on on Voltage is present on output
ch. 9.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 9.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 10.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 10.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 11.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 11.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 12.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 12.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 13.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 13.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 14.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 14.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 15.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 15.
on Voltage is present on output
ch. 16.
off Voltage is absent on output
ch. 16.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-
operational mode or in its
fallback state.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.

244 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DDO 3705 module uses two eighteen-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuators 1 ... 8
are wired to the left connector (A), and actuators 9 ... 16 are wired to the right connector (B).

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1180 screw-type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 2)
 two STB XTS 2180 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 2)
These field wiring connectors each have eighteen-channel connection terminals, with a 3.81 mm
(0.15 in) pitch between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DDO 3705 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-wire actuators such as solenoids, contactors, relays,
alarms or panel lamps that draw current up to 500 mA/channel.
NOTE: If you are using this module to provide operating power to a large inductive load (at or near
a maximum of 0.5 H), make sure that you turn the field device off before removing the field power
connector from the module. The output channel on the module may be damaged if you remove the
connector while the field device is on.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 to 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

Field Wiring Pinout

The left connector (A) supports digital output channels 1 ... 8; the right connector (B) supports
digital output channels 9 ... 16:

Pin Left Connector Right Connector

1 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 9
2 field power return field power return
3 output to actuator 2 output to actuator 10
4 field power return field power return
5 output to actuator 3 output to actuator 11
6 field power return field power return

31007720 08/2016 245

Digital Output Modules

Pin Left Connector Right Connector

7 output to actuator 4 output to actuator 12
8 field power return field power return
9 no connection no connection
10 output to actuator 5 output to actuator 13
11 field power return field power return
12 output to actuator 6 output to actuator 14
13 field power return field power return
14 output to actuator 7 output to actuator 15
15 field power return field power return
16 output to actuator 8 output to actuator 16
17 field power return field power return
18 no connection no connection

246 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows 16 actuators - 8 in group 1 (channels 1-8) and 8 in group
2 (channels 9-16) - connected to the STB DDO 3705 module. Pins 9 and 18 on each connector are
not used.

# Group 1 # Group 2
1 Channel 1, Connector A, Actuator 11 Channel 1, Connector B, Actuator
2 Channel 2, Connector A, Actuator 12 Channel 2, Connector B, Actuator
3 Channel 3, Connector A, Actuator 13 Channel 3, Connector B, Actuator
4 Channel 4, Connector A, Actuator 14 Channel 4, Connector B, Actuator
5 Pin 9, Connector A (not used) 15 Pin 9, Connector B (not used)
6 Channel 5, Connector A, Actuator 16 Channel 5, Connector B, Actuator
7 Channel 6, Connector A, Actuator 17 Channel 6, Connector B, Actuator

31007720 08/2016 247

Digital Output Modules

# Group 1 # Group 2
8 Channel 7, Connector A, Actuator 18 Channel 7, Connector B, Actuator
9 Channel 8, Connector A, Actuator 19 Channel 8, Connector B, Actuator
10 Pin 18, Connector A (not used) 20 Pin 18, Connector B (not used)

248 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DDO 3705 is a basic sixteen-channel module that writes digital output data to 2 groups
of eight 24 VDC field actuators, sd follows:
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 through 8
 group 2 comprises output channels 9 through 16
The module does not support user-configurable operating parameters or reflex actions.

Auto-recovery from Detected Faults

If an overcurrent fault is detected on any channel, that channel plus the others with which it is
grouped turns off. The module applies the fault recovery response to the channels in two groups:
 group 1 comprises output channels 1 through 8
 group 2 comprises output channels 9 through 16
A channel group that has been turned off because of a short circuit will start operating again as
soon as the faulty channel is corrected. The module is permanently set to auto-recover; no user
intervention is required to reset the channels.

Output Polarity
The polarity on all output channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)

Fallback States
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. All sixteen channels go to a predefined
fallback state of 0 VDC.

31007720 08/2016 249

Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image. Information
in the output data block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output
module. If you are not using a basic NIM, the information may also be monitored by an HMI panel
connected to the NIM’s CFG port.
The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. The STB DDO 3705 uses
one register in the output data block. The specific register is based on its physical location on the
island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module (NIM) Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each
supported fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The STB DDO 3705 basic high density output module’s output data register displays the most
current on/off states of the module’s sixteen output channels:

250 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DDO 3705 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 24 VDC, 0.5 A source output

number of output channels sixteen
module width 28.1 mm (1.11 in)
I/O base STB XBA 3000 (see page 375)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported no
short circuit protection yes
fault recovery per group:
 group 1 comprises channels 1...8
 group 2 comprises channels 9...16

fault recovery response auto-recovery

isolation voltage field-to-bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
reverse polarity protection from a miswired PDM will blow the fuse
PDM
logic bus current consumption 135 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 4.05 A, with no load
maximum load current 4 A total per module:
 2 A per group
 .5 A per channel

minimum load current None

output response off-to-on 2 ms@ 500 mA resistive load
time on-to-off 2 ms @ 500 mA resistive load
output voltage working 19.2 ... 30 VDC
absolute maximum 35 VDC for 1.3 ms, decaying voltage pulse
on-state drop/channel 0.4 VDC max.
off-state leakage/channel 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC max.
maximum surge current Self Limiting Per Point
maximum load capacitance 10 μF
maximum load inductance 1 H @ 4 Hz switch frequency

where:
L = load inductance (H)
I = load current (A)
F = switching frequency (Hz)

31007720 08/2016 251

Digital Output Modules

fallback mode predefined fallback values on all sixteen

channels
fallback states all sixteen channels go to 0 VDC
polarity on individual outputs logic normal on all sixteen channels
field power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
power protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow the user to hot swap I/O modules.

252 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Section 3.8
STB DAO 5260 Digital 115 VAC Source, Isolated Output Module (two-channel, 2 A)

STB DAO 5260 Digital 115 VAC Source, Isolated Output

Module (two-channel, 2 A)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DAO 5260 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DAO 5260 Physical Description 254
STB DAO 5260 LED Indicators 256
STB DAO 5260 Field Wiring 258
STB DAO 5260 Functional Description 260
STB DAO 5260 Data and Status for the Process Image 264
STB DAO 5260 Specifications 266

31007720 08/2016 253

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DAO 5260 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel isolated digital output module that
writes outputs to 115 VAC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. This module can
receive power from different phases of an AC power source. The module mounts in a size 2 I/O
base and uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to the top connector,
and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector.
The STB DAO 5260 module does not receive power from the PDM.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 red identification stripe, indicating a digital AC output module
5 actuator 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

254 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DAO 5260 K), which includes:
 one STB DAO 5260 digital output module
 one size 2 STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 5-terminal screw type connectors
 two 5-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DAO 5260 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

31007720 08/2016 255

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DAO 5260 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its two digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DAO 5260 digital output
module. The figure below shows their location:

256 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the communications
power is absent from the output channels when a watchdog
time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The module is not communicating with the If all I/O modules have a
island bus. blink 2 pattern, cycle power
to the island or replace the
NIM. If only this module has
a blink 2 pattern, replace the
module.
blink 3**** One or more of the output channels are in
fallback. This condition can occur only if one
or more output channels are configured for
reflex aciton.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

31007720 08/2016 257

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DAO 5260 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to
the top connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector. Each output must be wired with
an external fuse to protect the module from possible damage. The choices of connector types and
field wire types are described below, and some field wiring considerations are presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DAO 5260 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-, three- or four-wire devices such as solenoids,
contactors, relays, alarms or panel lamps.
When the module is operating at 30 degrees C, it supports two actuators that can draw current up
to 2.0 A/channel. At 60 degrees C, it supports two actuators that can draw current up to
1.0 A/channel.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

External Fusing
External fusing is required for each output. Use a 5 A fuse for each output.
To achieve over-current protection on the outputs, you must place external fuses in-line on each
output channel. Use a 5 A, 250 V 5 x 20 mm fuse such as the Wickmann 1911500000 on the wires
that connect the field device to pin 1 on each connector.

258 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports actuator 1, and the bottom connector supports actuator 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 115VAC source power 1 (to the module) 115VAC source power 2 (to the module)
2 output to actuator 1 output to actuator 2
3 output neutral 1 output neutral 2
4 field power neutral 1 (to the module) field power neutral 2 (to the module)
5 protective earth protective earth

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two actuators connected to an STB DAO 5260 output
module, with user-installed external fuses on each channel connection:

Within each connector, pins 3 and 4 are internally tied. The actuator on the top connector has a PE
connection that is tied to the PE connection on the PDM base through pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 259

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DAO 5260 module is a two-channel module that sends digital output data to two field
actuators that may be operating at 115 VAC. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can
customize the following operating parameters:
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAO 5260 The selected STB DAO 5260 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Output
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an output
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.

260 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Output Polarity row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Output Polarity value
changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
channel individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state or hold last value. When a
channel has predefined state as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either
1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state when
communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both channels is a predefined state. If you want to change the
fallback mode to hold last value, you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAO 5260 The selected STB DAO 5260 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for
where 0 means both channels hold Fallback Mode, the values associated
their last values and 3 means that both with the channels change.
channels go to a predefined state. For example, if you choose a fallback
mode value of 2, then Channel 1 goes to
hold last value and Channel 2 goes to a
predefined state.

31007720 08/2016 261

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Fallback Mode row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Fallback Mode value
changes to 2.

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, both channels are configured to go to 0 as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its default setting or to revert back to the default from an on setting,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value for the channel
value for the channel you want to is 0 (hold last value), any value entered in
configure is 1 (predefined state). the associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
Value row further by clicking on the + appear.
sign.
4a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Fallback Mode max/min values of the range appear at
row and enter a hexadecimal or the bottom of the module editor screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new Predefined
where 0 means both channels have 0 Fallback Value, the values associated
as their predefined fallback value and 3 with the channels change.
means that both channels have 1 as For example, if you choose a fallback
their predefined fallback value. state value of 2, then Channel 2 will turn
on as its fallback state. Channel 1 will
either turn off or be ignored, depending on
its fallback mode setting.

262 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Fallback Mode row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 2 to 1 and
pull-down menu(s). You can configure leave channel 1 at 0, the Predefined
a fallback state of either 0 or 1 for each Fallback Value value changes from 0 to 2.
channel on the module.

31007720 08/2016 263

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 Data and Status for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DAO 5260 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus has its data values represented in a register in this data block. The STB DAO 5260
uses one register in the output data block.
The STB DAO 5260’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
two output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

264 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Output Echo Register

The input data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the
range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the data
for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DAO 5260 is represented by one register that echoes the output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DAO 5260 module:

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the
channel is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 265

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 5260 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 115 VAC source (47 ... 63 Hz) output

number of output channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum
output surge protection metal oxide varistor and RC
suppression
output voltage (rms) working 20 ... 132 VAC
absolute maximum 200 VAC for 1 cycle
on-state drop/channel 2.0 VAC max.
off-state 132 VAC max. 2.0 mA
leakage/channel
maximum surge one cycle 30 A/channel
current (rms)
two cycles 20 A/channel
isolation voltage output-to-output 1780 VAC for 1 min
field-to-bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
logic bus current consumption 70 mA
maximum load current (rms) 2 A/channel @ 30 degrees C
1 A/channel @ 60 degrees C
external fusing for the outputs 5 A time-lag fuses
minimum load current (rms) 1 mA
output response time off-to-on 0.5 line cycle
output turns on at AC
on-to-off 0.5 line cycle
voltage 0 crossing
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable setting 1 hold last value
predefined fallback value on one or both
channels
fallback states (when default both channels go to 0
predefined is the user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
fallback mode)
settings1

266 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

description 115 VAC source (47 ... 63 Hz) output

polarity on individual default logic normal on both channels
outputs
user-configurable logic reverse on one or both channels
settings1 logic normal on one or both channels
field power requirements from a 115 VAC field source
power protection - 5 A external fuse required (e.g.
Wickmann 1911500000)
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
operating temperature range 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
1Requires
the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 267

Digital Output Modules

Section 3.9
STB DAO 8210 Digital 115/230 VAC Source Output Module (two-channel, 2 A)

STB DAO 8210 Digital 115/230 VAC Source Output Module

(two-channel, 2 A)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DAO 8210 digital output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DAO 8210 Physical Description 269
STB DAO 8210 LED Indicators 271
STB DAO 8210 Field Wiring 273
STB DAO 8210 Functional Description 276
STB DAO 8210 Data for the Process Image 280
STB DAO 8210 Specifications 282

268 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DAO 8210 is a standard Advantys STB two-channel digital output module that writes
outputs to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC actuator devices and provides power to the actuators. The
module mounts in a size 2 I/O base and uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1
is wired to the top connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 red identification stripe, indicating a digital AC output module
5 actuator 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 actuator 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 269

Digital Output Modules

Ordering Information
The module and its related parts may be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB DAO 8210 digital output module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Module Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

270 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 LED Indicators

Purpose
The four LEDs on the STB DAO 8210 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its two digital output channels. The LED locations and their meanings are described
below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top front of the STB DAO 8210 digital output
module. The figure below shows their location:

31007720 08/2016 271

Digital Output Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving logic Check power
power or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Voltage is present on output channel 1.

off Voltage is absent on output channel 1.
on Voltage is present on output channel 2.
off Voltage is absent on output channel 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the communications
power is absent from the output channels when a watchdog
time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected. Cycle power, restart the
communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace NIM
blink 3**** The output channels on this module are
operational while the rest of the island
modules are in their fallback states. This
condition could occur if the module is
used in a reflex action.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

272 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DAO 8210 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Actuator 1 is wired to
the top connector, and actuator 2 is wired to the bottom connector. Each output should be wired
with an external fuse to protect the module from possible damage. The choices of connector types
and field wire types are described below, and some field wiring considerations are presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Actuators
The STB DAO 8210 is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control continuous-operation
equipment. It supports field wiring to two-, three- or four-wire devices such as solenoids,
contactors, relays, alarms or panel lamps.
When the module is operating at 30 degrees C, it supports two actuators that can draw current up
to 2.0 A/channel. At 60 degrees C, it supports two actuators that can draw current up to
1.0 A/channel.

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 273

Digital Output Modules

External Fusing
Two different external fuse types may be used:
 5 A fuses for the outputs
 0.5 A fuses for accessory power
Because of the triac used in this module, the 10 A fuse in the PDM will not provide over-current
protection to the outputs. To achieve over-current protection on the outputs, you must place
external fuses in-line on each output channel. Use a 5 A, 250 V 5 x 20 mm fuse such as the
Wickmann 1911500000 on the wires that connect the field device to pin 2 on each connector.
The STB DAO 8210 does not provide electronic over-current protection when the actuator bus is
supplying accessory power to a field device. To achieve over-current protection for accessories,
you should place external fuses in-line on pin 1. If you do not use fuses, an over-current condition
could damage the module and blow the 10 A fuse in the PDM. Use a 0.5 A, 250 V 5 x 20 mm time-
lag fuse such as the Wickmann 1910500000.

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports actuator 1, and the bottom connector supports actuator 2:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 actuator bus power (L1) actuator bus power (L1)
2 output to actuator 1 (common with L1) output to actuator 2 (common with L1)
3 field power neutral or L2 field power neutral or L2
4 field power neutral or L2 field power neutral or L2
5 protective earth protective earth

274 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows two actuators connected to an STB DAO 8210 output
module, with user-installed external fuses on each channel connection:

1 actuator bus power (L1) to actuator 1 (top)

2 output to actuator 1 (top) and actuator 2 (bottom)
3 L2 from actuator 1 (top) and field power neutral from actuator 2 (bottom)
5 PE connection point for actuator 1 (top)

The four-wire actuator on the top connector has a PE connection that is tied to the PE connection
on the PDM base through pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 275

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DAO 8210 module is a two-channel module that sends digital output data to two field
actuators that may be operating at either 115 or 230 VAC. Using the Advantys configuration
software, you can customize the following operating parameters:
 logic normal or logic reverse output polarity for each channel on the module
 a fallback state for each channel on the module

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal, where:
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
The output polarity on one or both channels may optionally be configured for logic reverse, where:
 1 indicates that the physical actuator is off (or the output signal is low)
 0 indicates that the physical actuator is on (or the output signal is high)
To change an output polarity parameter from the default or back to the normal from reverse, you
need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAO 8210 The selected STB DAO 8210 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Output
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an output
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.

276 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Output Polarity row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Output Polarity value
changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the output module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output channels must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are
restored. This is known as the channel’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
channel individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each channel
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state or hold last value. When a
channel has predefined state as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either
1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state when
communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both channels is a predefined state. If you want to change the
fallback mode to hold last value, you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DAO 8210 The selected STB DAO 8210 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.
4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max/min values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for
where 0 means both channels hold Fallback Mode, the values associated
their last values and 3 means that both with the channels change.
channels go to a predefined state. For example, if you choose a fallback
mode value of 2, then Channel 1 goes to
hold last value and Channel 2 goes to a
predefined state.

31007720 08/2016 277

Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Fallback Mode row changes.
select the desired setting(s) from the For example, if you set channel 1 to 0 and
pull-down menu(s). channel 2 to 1, the Fallback Mode value
changes to 2.

Fallback States
If an output channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either
turn on or turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By
default, both channels are configured to go to 0 as their fallback states:
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic normal, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is off
 If the output polarity of a channel is logic reverse, 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state
of the output is on
NOTE: If an output channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any
value that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its default setting or to revert back to the default from an on setting,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value for the channel
value for the channel you want to is 0 (hold last value), any value entered in
configure is 1 (predefined state). the associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
Value row further by clicking on the + appear.
sign.
4a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Predefined max/min values of the range appear at
Fallback Value row and enter a the bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new Predefined
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Fallback Value, the values associated
channels have 0 as their predefined with the channels change.
fallback value and 3 means that both For example, if you choose a fallback
channels have 1 as their predefined state value of 2, then Channel 2 will turn
fallback value. on as its fallback state. Channel 1 will
either turn off or be ignored, depending on
its fallback mode setting.

278 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Step Action Result

4b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
value(s) you want to change, then in the Predefined Fallback Value row
select the desired setting(s) from the changes.
pull-down menu(s). You can configure For example, if you set channel 2 to 1 and
a fallback state of either 0 or 1 for each leave channel 1 at 0, the Predefined
channel on the module. Fallback Value value changes from 0 to 2.

31007720 08/2016 279

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 Data for the Process Image

Representing Digital Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of output data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of output status in another block of registers in the process image. Information in the output data
block is written to the NIM by the fieldbus master and is used to update the output module. The
information in the status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DAO 8210 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Output Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus has its data values represented in a register in this data block. The STB DAO 8210
uses one register in the output data block.
The STB DAO 8210’s output data register displays the most current on/off states of the module’s
two output channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

280 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

Output Status Registers

The input data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the
range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the data
for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DAO 8210 is represented by one register that echoes the output data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the output field devices by the
STB DAO 8210 module:

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the output data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from an output channel used for a reflex action, where the
channel is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 281

Digital Output Modules

STB DAO 8210 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 115/230 VAC source output

number of output channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
output surge protection metal oxide varistor and RC suppression
output voltage (rms) working 20 ... 265 VAC
absolute maximum 300 VAC for 10 s
400 VAC for 1 cycle
on-state drop/channel 1.5 VAC max.
off-state @ 230 VAC max. 2.5 mA
leakage/channel
@ 115 VAC max. 2.0 mA
maximum surge one cycle 30 A/channel
current (rms) two cycles 20 A/channel
logic bus current consumption 45 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 4.2 A, with no load
maximum load current (rms) 2 A/channel @ 30 degrees C
1 A/channel @ 60 degrees C
external fusing for the outputs 5 A time-lag fuses
minimum load current (rms) 5 mA
Applied dV/dt 400 V/μs
output response time off-to-on 10.0 ms
output turns on at AC
on-to-off 10.5 ms
voltage 0 crossing
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable hold last value
setting** predefined fallback value on one or both
channels
fallback states (when default both channels go to 0
predefined is the user-configurable each channel configurable for 1 or 0
fallback mode)
settings1

282 31007720 08/2016

 Digital Output Modules

polarity on individual default logic normal on both channels

outputs
user-configurable logic reverse on one or both channels
settings1 logic normal on one or both channels
actuator bus power for accessories 100 mA/channel @ 30 degrees C
50 mA/channel @ 60 degrees C
over-current protection for accessory power none
external fusing for accessories 0.5 A time-lag fuses
field power requirements from a 115 VAC or 230 VAC PDM
power protection with an STB PDT 2100 time-lag fuse on the PDM
storage temperature - 40 to 85°C
operating temperature 0 to 60°C
operating voltage range 19.2 to 30 VDC
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
**Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.

31007720 08/2016 283

Digital Output Modules

284 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Relay Modules
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 4
The Advantys STB Relay Modules

The Advantys STB Relay Modules

Overview
This chapter describes in detail the features of the relay modules in the Advantys STB family.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
4.1 STB DRC 3210 Relay Output Module (two-point, form C, 2 A, 24 V coil) 286
4.2 STB DRA 3290 Relay Output Module (two-point, form A/B, 7 A/contact, 24 V 302
coil)

31007720 08/2016 285

Relay Modules

Section 4.1
STB DRC 3210 Relay Output Module (two-point, form C, 2 A, 24 V coil)

STB DRC 3210 Relay Output Module (two-point, form C, 2 A,

24 V coil)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DRC 3210 relay output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DRC 3210 Physical Description 287
STB DRC 3210 LED Indicators 289
STB DRC 3210 Field Wiring 291
STB DRC 3210 Functional Description 294
STB DRC 3210 Data for the Process Image 298
STB DRC 3210 Specification 300

286 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DRC 3210 is a standard Advantys STB form C relay module that switches 24 VDC,
115 VAC or 230 VAC field devices. Its coil runs on 24 VDC from the island’s actuator bus. The
module provides access to both the normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.C.) contacts of
the internal relays. It mounts in a size 2 I/O base and uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors.
Field device 1 is wired to the top connector, and field device 2 is wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 black identification stripe, indicating a relay output module
5 field device 1 connects to the top field wiring connector)
6 field device 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 287

Relay Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DRC 3210 K), which includes:
 one STB DRC 3210 digital relay output module
 one size 2 STB XBA 2000 (see page 371) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 5-terminal screw type connectors
 two 5-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DRC 3210 digital relay output module
 a standalone STB XBA 2000 size 2 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw clamp
connectors)

288 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 LED Indicators

Overview
The four LEDs on the STB DRC 3210 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its two relay outputs. The LED locations and their meanings are described below.

Location
The four LEDs are positioned in a column on the top of the STB DRC 3210 relay output module.
The figure below shows their location:

31007720 08/2016 289

Relay Modules

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving power Check power
or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Relay 1 is energized.
off Voltage is absent on relay 1.
on Relay 2 is energized.
off Voltage is absent on relay 2.
on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the communications
power is absent from the output channels when a watchdog
time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
on or blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected—e.g., Cycle power, restart
blink 1** a counter overflow. communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace NIM
blink 3**** The relays on this module are operational
while the rest of the island modules are in
their fallback states—i.e., it is a reflex
action module.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

290 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DRC 3210 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors. Relay output 1 is wired
from the top connector, and relay output 2 is wired from the bottom connector. The choices of
connector types and field wire types are described below, and some field wiring options are
presented.
NOTE: For operation between 60 and 70 °C (140 and 158 °F), only 1 relay output point, rated at a
maximum load of 2 amps, can be on.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.

Field Devices
The STB DRC 3210 module provides two form C relay outputs that can be independently field
wired as N.O. and/or N.C. contacts The module is designed to handle high duty cycles and to
control continuous-operation equipment. It can switch 24 VDC, 115 VAC, and/or 230 VAC field
devices that draw up to 2 A/relay at 30 degrees C.
The relay module needs to be placed in a voltage group supported by a 24 VDC PDM.

CAUTION
COMPROMISED DOUBLE INSULATION
Above 130 VAC, the relay module may compromise the double insulation provided by a SELV-
rated power supply.
When you use a relay module, use separate external 24 VDC power supplies for the PDM
supporting that module and the logic power to the NIM or BOS module when the contact voltage
is above 130 VAC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

31007720 08/2016 291

Relay Modules

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire. Use wire sizes in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
(24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our recommended wire size for the protective earth
(PE) connection on pin 5.

External Fusing
The STB DRC 3210 does not provide internal over-current protection. You must provide external
fuse protection with 2.0 A time-lag fuses (such as the Wickmann 1911200000). If you do not use
fuses, an over-current condition could damage the module. Place a fuse in series with each relay
on the common line (pin 1).

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports relay 1, and the bottom connector supports relay 2. Field actuators can
be wired as normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.). Two- and three-wire actuators are
supported.
The table below shows the pinouts:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 relay common 1 relay common 2
2 N.O. connection for relay 1 N.O. connection for relay 2
3 N.C. connection for relay 1 N.C. connection for relay 2
4 no connection no connection
5 PE PE

292 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Sample Wiring Diagrams

The following field wiring example shows a N.O. device and a N.C. device wired to each connector:

1 relay common connections

2 N.O. connections
3 N.C. connections
5 PE connection point for field device (bottom)

The N.C. load on the bottom connector has a PE connection that is tied to the PE connection on
the PDM base through pin 5.

31007720 08/2016 293

Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DRC 3210 module provides two form C relay outputs that can be independently field
wired as N.O. and/or N.C. contacts. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize
the following operating parameters:
 logic normal or logic reverse polarity for each relay contact on the module
 a fallback state for each of the two channels

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal (0). Polarity on one or both channels
may optionally be configured for logic reverse (1). Depending on whether the field devices are
wired as N.O. or N.C., the output will behave as follows:

If the channel is and the polarity is when the channel’s the output will be:
field wired to be: configured to be: value is:
N.O. logic normal (the factory 0 open
default setting
1 closed
N.C. 0 closed
1 open
N.O. logic reverse 0 closed
1 open
N.C. 0 open
1 closed

Essentially, if you reverse the polarity on a N.O. contact it will behave as an N.C. contact, and if
you reverse the polarity on an N.C. contact it will behave as an N.O. contact.
To change an output polarity parameter from logic normal (0), or back to normal from logic reverse
(1), use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DRC 3210 you The selected STB DRC 3210 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

294 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the maxi/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Output
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an output
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Output Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 1 to
menu. normal polarity and channel 2 to reverse
polarity, the Output Polarity value
changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications are lost between the relay module and the fieldbus master, the module’s
output relays must go to a known state where they will remain until communications are restored.
This is known as the relay’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each relay
individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each relay
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
All relay outputs have a fallback mode—either predefined state (1), or hold last value (0). When a
relay has predefined state as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state, either 1
or 0. When a relay has hold last value (0) as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known state when
communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both relays is a predefined state. In order to change the fallback
mode to hold last value, use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DRC 3210 The selected STB DDO 3200 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

31007720 08/2016 295

Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, select the integer that appears in value, the max./min. values of the range
the Value column of the Fallback Mode appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for
where 0 means both relays hold their Fallback Mode, the values associated
last values and 3 means that both with the channels change.
relays go to a predefined state. For example, if you choose a fallback
mode value of 2, then Channel 1 goes to
hold last value, and Channel 2 goes to its
predefined state.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Fallback Mode row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 1 to hold
menu. last value, and channel 2 to predefined
state, the Fallback Mode value changes
to 2.

Fallback States
If a relay’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either turn on or
turn off when communication between the module and the fieldbus master is lost. By default, both
channels are configured to go to 0 as their fallback states:
 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state of the relay is de-energized
 1 indicates that the predefined fallback state of the relay is energized
NOTE: If a relay channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any value
that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from its predefined state, or to revert back to the default from hold last
value, use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value is 0 (hold last
value for the relay you want to value), any value entered in the
configure is 1 (predefined state). associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
Value row further by clicking on the + appear.
sign.

296 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, select the integer that appears in with Predefined Fallback Value, the
the Value column of the Predefined max/min values of the range appear at
Fallback Value row and enter a the bottom of the module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new Predefined
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Fallback Value, the values associated
relays will turn off as their fallback state with the channels change.
and 3 means that both relays will turn For example, if you choose a fallback
on as their predefined state. state value of 2, then Channel 2 will turn
on as its fallback state. Channel 1 will
either turn off or be ignored, depending on
its fallback mode setting.
4b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Predefined Fallback Value row
the desired settings from the pull-down changes.
menu. Select 0 if you want the fallback For example, if you set channel 2 to 1 and
state to be relay de-energized; select 1 leave channel 1 on 0, the Predefined
if you want the fallback state to be relay Fallback Value value changes from 0 to 2.
energized.

31007720 08/2016 297

Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 Data for the Process Image

Representing Relay Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of relay data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of relay status in another block of registers in the process image. Relay data is written to the output
data block by the fieldbus master and is used to update the relay module. The information in the
status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DRC 3210 module are based on its physical location on the island bus.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Relay Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data returned by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in this data block. The STB DRC 3210 uses one register in the output
data block.
The STB DRC 3210’s data register represents the energized/de-energized states of the two
relays:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

298 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Relay Status Registers

The echo output data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in
the range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the
data for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DRC 3210 is represented by one register that echoes the relay data register.
This register represents the data that has just been sent to the field devices by the relay module.

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the relay data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data register
and the echo register could result from a relay channel used for a reflex action, where the channel
is updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 299

Relay Modules

STB DRC 3210 Specification

Table of Technical Specifications

The module’s technical specifications are described in the following table.

description form C N.O./N.C. contact relay pairs

number of relay channels two
module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
I/O base STB XBA 2000 (see page 371)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
relay contact life mechanical 1,000,000 operations
electrical 100,000 operations (resistive load @
maximum voltage and current)
output surge protection metal oxide varistor
output voltage working DC 5 ... 30 VDC
working AC 20 ... 250 VAC
isolation voltage logic bus-to-actuator bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
point-to-point 500 VAC for 1 min
field-to-logic bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
logic bus current consumption 55 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 25 mA with no load
load current maximum 2.0 A./relay
minimum 50 mA
output response time off-to-on 5.25 ms
on-to-off 6.75 ms
maximum surge current 20 A/relay capacitive load@ τ = 10 ms
off-state leakage for resistive loads 2 mA (internal MOV)
current
switching capability 600 VA resistive load
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable hold last value
settings1 predefined fallback value on one or both
relays
fallback states (when default both relays de-energized
predefined is the user-configurable each relay configurable for energized or
fallback mode)
settings1 de-energized

300 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

polarity on individual default logic normal on both relays

relay contacts
user-configurable logic reverse on one or both relays
settings1 logic normal on one or both relays
coil power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
coil protection time lag fuse on the PDM

***operating temperature range 2 0 to 60°C

storage temperature -40to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE
171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
*** This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of capabilities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.
2For operation between 60 to 70°C, only 1 relay output point, rated at a maximum load of 2
Amps, may be used. The relay module resides in the DC power group. The PDT 3100 is
restricted to operate from 19.2 to 24.5 V in the 60 to 70°C temperature range.

31007720 08/2016 301

Relay Modules

Section 4.2
STB DRA 3290 Relay Output Module (two-point, form A/B, 7 A/contact, 24 V coil)

STB DRA 3290 Relay Output Module (two-point, form A/B,

7 A/contact, 24 V coil)

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the Advantys STB DRA 3290 relay output
module—its functions, physical design, technical specifications, field wiring requirements, and
configuration options.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB DRA 3290 Physical Description 303
STB DRA 3290 LED Indicators 305
STB DRA 3290 Field Wiring 307
STB DRA 3290 Functional Description 310
STB DRA 3290 Data for the Process Image 314
STB DRA 3290 Specifications 316

302 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB DRA 3290 is a standard Advantys STB Form A/Form B, high current relay module that
switches 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC field devices. Its coil runs on 24 VDC from the island’s
actuator bus. The module provides access to both the normally open (N.O.) and normally closed
(N.C.) contacts of the internal relays. The module mounts in a size 3 I/O base and uses two five-
terminal field wiring connectors. Field device 1 is wired to the top connector, and field device 2 is
wired to the bottom connector.

Front Panel View

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 black identification stripe, indicating that this is a special module (the contacts can use either AC or DC
power)
5 field device 1 connects to the top field wiring connector
6 field device 2 connects to the bottom field wiring connector

31007720 08/2016 303

Relay Modules

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB DRA 3290 K), which includes:
 one STB DRA 3290 digital relay output module
 one size 3 STB XBA 3000 (see page 375) I/O base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 5-terminal screw type connectors
 two 5-terminal spring clamp connectors

Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:

 a standalone STB DRA 3290 digital relay output module
 a standalone STB XBA 3000 size 3 base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1110) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2110)
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 keying pin kit for inserting the module into the base
 the STB XMP 7800 keying pin kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 28.1 mm (1.06 in)

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base 128.25 mm (5.05 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)

304 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 LED Indicators

Overview
Four LEDs on the STB DRA 3290 module are visual indications of the operating status of the
module and its two relay outputs. The LED locations and their meanings are described below.

Location
The four LED indicators are positioned in a column on the top of the STB DRA 3290 relay output
module. The figure below shows their location:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the four LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

off off The module is either not receiving power Check power
or has failed.
flicker* off Auto-addressing is in progress.
on off The module has achieved all of the
following:
 it has power
 it has passed its confidence tests
 it is operational

on Relay 1 is energized.
off Relay 1 is not energized.
on Relay 2 is energized.
off Relay 2 is not energized.

31007720 08/2016 305

Relay Modules

RDY ERR OUT1 OUT2 Meaning What to Do

on on on on The watchdog has timed out. Cycle power, restart the
communications
Note that the green output LEDs will be on even though the
power is absent from the output channels when a watchdog
time-out occurs.
blink 1** The module is either in pre-operational
mode or in its fallback state.
on or blink 1** A nonfatal error has been detected—e.g., Cycle power, restart
blink 1** a counter overflow. communications
blink 2*** The island bus is not running. Check network
connections, replace NIM
blink 3**** The relays on this module are operational
while the rest of the island modules are in
their fallback states—i.e., it is a reflex
action module.
* flicker—the LED flickers when it is repeatedly on for 50 ms then off for 50 ms.
** blink 1—the LED blinks on for 200 ms then off for 200 ms. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition
changes.
*** blink 2—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off for 1 s. This pattern is repeated
until the causal condition changes.
**** blink 3—the LED blinks on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, off for 200 ms, on again for 200 ms then off
for 1 s. This pattern is repeated until the causal condition changes.

306 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 Field Wiring

Summary
The STB DRA 3290 module uses two five-terminal field wiring connectors to connect the two field
devices. Output 1 is wired from the top connector, and output 2 is wired from the bottom connector.
The choices of connector types and field wire types are described below, and a field wiring diagram
is presented.
NOTE: For operation between 60 and 70 °C (140 and 158 °F), only 1 relay output point, rated at a
maximum load of 4 amps, can be on.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 two STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
 two STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring connectors (available in a kit of 20)
These field wiring connectors each have five connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between each pin.
The relay module needs to be placed in a voltage group supported by a 24 VDC PDM.

CAUTION
COMPROMISED DOUBLE INSULATION
Above 130 VAC, the relay module may compromise the double insulation provided by a SELV-
rated power supply.
When you use a relay module, use separate external 24 VDC power supplies for the PDM
supporting that module and the logic power to the NIM or BOS module when the contact voltage
is above 130 VAC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Field Devices
The STB DRA 3290 module provides two form A/B relay outputs that can be independently field
wired as N.O. and/or N.C. contacts The module is designed to handle high duty cycles and to
control continuous-operation equipment. It can switch 24 VDC, 115 VAC, and/or 230 VAC field
devices that draw up to 7.0 A/contact at 60° C (140° F).

Field Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals accept one field wire in the range 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 (24 ... 16 AWG).
We recommend that you strip at least 9 mm from the wire’s jacket for the module connection.

31007720 08/2016 307

Relay Modules

External Fusing
The STB DRA 3290 does not provide internal over-current protection. You must provide external
fuse protection with 7.0 A/ time-lag fuses (such as the Wickmann 1911700000). If you do not use
fuses, an over-current condition could damage the module. Place a fuse in series with each contact
used on each relay (pins 1 and 4).

Surge Protection
The STB DRA 3290 relay outputs have internal metal oxide varistors (MOVs) that enable the
contacts to control:
 electrically isolated inputs with low energy levels, which require zero leakage current
 power circuits—by eliminating induced overvoltages at the source
However, when the contacts are exposed to large dv/dt we recommend that additional surge
protection be used. The specifications for the MOV are listed in the module specification chart at
the end of this section (see page 316).

Field Wiring Pinout

The top connector supports relay 1, and the bottom connector supports relay 2. Field actuators can
be wired for normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) operations.
The table below shows the pinouts:

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 N.O. connection for relay 1 N.O. connection for relay 2
2 N.O. connection for relay 1 N.O. connection for relay 2
3 no connection no connection
4 N.C. connection for relay 1 N.C. connection for relay 2
5 N.C. connection for relay 1 N.C. connection for relay 2

308 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

The following field wiring example shows an N.O. device and an N.C. device wired to each
connector. An AC power supply is used for the circuits on the top connector, and a DC power
supply is used for the circuits on the bottom connector:

7 A 250 V
1

7 A 250 V
4
5

7 A 30 V
1
2

7 A 30 V
4
5

+ -
1 and 2 N.O. contacts
4 and 5 N.C. contacts

31007720 08/2016 309

Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 Functional Description

Functional Characteristics
The STB DRA 3290 module provides two form A/B relays that can be independently field wired as
either N.O. or N.C. contacts. The module is designed to handle high duty cycles and to control
continuous-operation equipment. Using the Advantys configuration software, you can customize
the following operating parameters:
 logic normal or logic reverse polarity for each relay contact on the module
 a fallback state for each of the two channels

Output Polarity
By default, the polarity on both output channels is logic normal. Polarity on one or both channels
may optionally be configured for logic reverse. Depending on whether the field devices are wired
as N.O. or N.C., the output will behave as follows:

If the channel is and the polarity is when the channel’s the output will be:
field wired to be: configured to be: output value is:
N.O. logic normal (the factory 0 open
default setting
1 closed
N.C. 0 closed
1 open
N.O. logic reverse 0 closed
1 open
N.C. 0 open
1 closed

Essentially, if you reverse the polarity on a N.O. contact it will behave as an N.C. contact, and if
you reverse the polarity on an N.C. contact it will behave as an N.O. contact.
To change an output polarity parameter from logic normal, or back to normal from logic reverse,
you need to use the Advantys configuration software.
You can configure the output polarity on each output channel independently:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DRA 3290 you The selected STB DRA 3290 module
want to configure in the island editor. opens in the software module editor.
2 Expand the + Polarity Settings fields by A row called + Output Polarity appears.
clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Output Polarity row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

310 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Output Polarity
level, select the integer that appears in value, the maxi/min values of the range
the Value column of the Output Polarity appear at the bottom of the module editor
row and enter a hexadecimal or screen.
decimal integer in the range 0 to 3, When you accept a new value for Output
where 0 means both channels have Polarity, the values associated with the
normal polarity and 3 means that both channels change.
channels have reverse polarity. For example, if you choose an output
polarity value of 2, Channel 1 has normal
polarity and Channel 2 has reverse
polarity.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Output Polarity row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 1 to
menu. normal polarity, and channel 2 to reverse
polarity, the Output Polarity value
changes to 2.

Fallback Modes
When communications on the island bus are stopped between the module and the NIM, the
module will set both output channels to a known state where they will remain until communications
are restored. This is known as the relay’s fallback state. You may configure fallback states for each
relay individually. Fallback configuration is accomplished in two steps:
 first by configuring fallback modes for each relay
 then (if necessary) configuring the fallback states
Both output channels have a fallback mode—either predefined state or hold last value. When a
channel has predefined state (1) as its fallback mode, it can be configured with a fallback state,
either 1 or 0. When a channel has hold last value (0) as its fallback mode, it stays at its last known
state when communication is lost— it cannot be configured with a predefined fallback state.
By default, the fallback mode for both channels is a predefined state (1). To change the fallback
mode to hold last value (0), use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Double click on the STB DRA 3290 The selected STB DRA 3290 module
module you want to configure in the opens in the software module editor.
island editor.
2 Expand the + Fallback Mode Settings A row called + Fallback Mode appears.
fields by clicking on the + sign.
3 Expand the + Fallback Mode row Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
further by clicking on the + sign. appear.

31007720 08/2016 311

Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change the settings at the module When you select the Fallback Mode
level, double-click on the integer that value, the max/min values of the range
appears in the Value column of the appear at the bottom left and right of the
Fallback Mode row, then enter a module editor screen.
hexadecimal or decimal integer in the When you accept a new value for
range 0 to 3, where 0 means both Fallback Mode, the values associated
relays hold their last values and 3 with the channels change.
means that both relays go to a For example, if you choose a fallback
predefined state. mode value of 2, then Channel 1 goes to
hold last value and Channel 2 goes to a
predefined state.
4b To change the settings at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Fallback Mode row changes.
the desired settings from the pull-down For example, if you set channel 1 to hold
menu. last value, and channel 2 to its predefined
state, the Fallback Mode value changes
to 2.

Fallback States
If a channel’s fallback mode is predefined state, you may configure that channel to either turn on
or turn off when communication between the NIM and the fieldbus master is lost. By default, both
channels are configured to 0 as their fallback states:
 0 indicates that the predefined fallback state of the relay is de-energized
 1 indicates that the predefined fallback state of the relay is energized
NOTE: If a relay channel has been configured with hold last value as its fallback mode, any value
that you try to configure as a Predefined Fallback Value will be ignored.
To modify a fallback state from hold last value, or to revert back to the default from a predefined
state, use the Advantys configuration software:

Step Action Result

1 Make sure that the Fallback Mode If the Fallback Mode value is 0 (hold last
value for the relay you want to value), any value entered in the
configure is 1 (predefined state). associated Predefined Fallback Value
row will be ignored.
2 Expand the + Predefined Fallback A row called + Predefined Fallback Value
Value Settings fields by clicking on the appears.
+ sign.
3 Expand the + Predefined Fallback Rows for Channel 1 and Channel 2
Value row further by clicking on the + appear.
sign.

312 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Step Action Result

4a To change a setting at the module When you select the value associated
level, double-click on the integer that with Predefined Fallback Value, the
appears in the Value column of the max/min values of the range appear at
Predefined Fallback Value row, then the bottom of the module editor screen.
enter a hexadecimal or decimal integer When you accept a new Predefined
in the range 0 to 3, where 0 means Fallback Value, the values associated
both relays will turn off as their fallback with the channels change.
state and 3 means that both relays will For example, if you choose a fallback
turn on as their predefined state. state value of 2, then Channel 2 will turn
on as its fallback state. Channel 1 will
either turn off or be ignored, depending on
its fallback mode setting.
4b To change a setting at the channel When you accept a new value for a
level, double click on the channel channel setting, the value for the module
values you want to change, then select in the Predefined Fallback Value row
the desired settings from the pull-down changes.
menu. Select 0 if you want the fallback For example, if you set channel 2 to 1,
state to be relay de-energized; select 1 and leave channel 1 set to 0, the
if you want the fallback state to be relay Predefined Fallback Value value changes
energized. from 0 to 2.

31007720 08/2016 313

Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 Data for the Process Image

Representing Relay Output Data

The NIM keeps a record of relay data in one block of registers in the process image and a record
of relay status in another block of registers in the process image. Relay data is written to the output
data block by the fieldbus master and is used to update the relay module. The information in the
status block is provided by the module itself.
This process image information can be monitored by the fieldbus master or, if you are not using a
basic NIM, by an HMI panel connected to the NIM’s CFG port. The specific registers used by the
STB DRA 3290 module are based on its physical location on the island bus; they can be viewed
using the Advantys configuration software.
NOTE: The data format illustrated below is common across the island bus, regardless of the
fieldbus on which the island is operating. The data is also transferred to and from the master in a
fieldbus-specific format. For fieldbus-specific descriptions, refer to one of the Advantys STB
Network Interface Module Application Guides. Separate guides are available for each supported
fieldbus.

Relay Data Register

The output data process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in the range 40001
through 44096) that represents the data received by the fieldbus master. Each output module on
the island bus is represented in this data block. The STB DRA 3290 uses one register in the output
data block.
The STB DRA 3290’s data register represents the energized/de-energized states of the two
channels:

These values are written to the island bus by the fieldbus master.

314 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

Relay Status Register

The echo output data and I/O status process image is a reserved block of 4096 16-bit registers (in
the range 45392 through 49487) that represents the status of all the I/O modules (along with the
data for the input modules) on the island bus.
The STB DRA 3290 status register is the module’s echo relay data register. This register
represents the data that has just been sent to the field devices by the relay module:

Under most normal operating conditions, the bit values in this register should be an exact replica
of the bits in the relay data register. A difference between the bit values in the output data and the
echo relay data could result from a relay channel used for a reflex action, where the channel is
updated directly by the output module instead of by the fieldbus master.

31007720 08/2016 315

Relay Modules

STB DRA 3290 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description form A/B N.O./N.C. contact high

current relay
number of channels two
module width 28.1 mm (1.06 in)
I/O base STB XBA 3000 (see page 375)
hot swapping supported* NIM-dependent**
reflex actions supported two maximum1
protection IP20
protection class class 1
relay contact life mechanical 1,000,000 operations
electrical 100,000 operations @ 60 degrees C
ambient, 7 A, 0.5 Hz resistive load
(or with external protection for
inductive loads)
output surge protection two MOVs, one/relay
MOV characteristics Vrms 300 V
VDC 375 V
Imax (8/20 μs) 400 A
Wmax (2 ms) 9.6 J
Pmax 0.1 W
output voltage working DC 5 ... 30 VDC
working AC 20 ... 250 VAC
isolation voltage logic bus-to-actuator bus 1500 VDC for 1 min
point-to-point 500 VAC for 1 min
field-to-logic bus 1780 VAC for 1 min
actuator voltage @ ambient temperature 19.2 ... 30 VDC
@ maximum temperature 22 ... 30 VDC
logic bus current consumption 55 mA
nominal actuator bus current consumption 25 mA with no load
maximum load current 7.0 A/contact
minimum load current 50 mA
output response time off-to-on 20 ms maximum
on-to-off 20 ms maximum

316 31007720 08/2016

 Relay Modules

switching frequency 30 operations/min (0.5 Hz)

maximum surge current 70 A for 10 ms for a capacitive load
off-state leakage current for resistive loads 2 mA (internal MOV)
external user-supplied with an AC power supply RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak limiter
surge protection with a DC power supply discharge diode
(recommended for
inductive loads)
switching capability 2100 VA resistive load
fallback mode default predefined
user-configurable setting 1 hold last value
predefined fallback value on one or
both relays
fallback states (when default both channels de-energized
predefined is the fallback user-configurable each channel configurable for
mode)
settings1 energized or de-energized
polarity on individual relay default logic normal on both relays
contacts user-configurable logic reverse on one or both relays
settings1 logic normal on one or both relays
coil power requirements from a 24 VDC PDM
coil protection time-lag fuse on the PDM
***operating temperature range 2 0 to 60°C
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System
Planning and Installation Guide, 890
USE 171 00
*ATEX applications prohibit hot swapping-refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
** Basic NIMs do not allow you to hot swap I/O modules.
*** This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of cabalities and limitations.
1
Requires the Advantys configuration software.
2
For operation between 60 to 70°C, only 1 relay output point, rated at a maximum load of 4
Amps, may be used. The relay module resides in the DC power group. The PDT 3100 is
restricted to operate from 19.2 to 24.5 V in the 60 to 70°C temperature range.

31007720 08/2016 317

Relay Modules

318 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Power Distribution Modules
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 5
Advantys Power Distribution Modules

Advantys Power Distribution Modules

Overview
The island bus uses special-purpose PDMs to distribute field power to the I/O modules in its
segment(s). There are two classes of PDMs, those that distribute:
 24 VDC power to digital and analog I/O that operate with DC-powered field devices
 115 or 230 VAC to digital I/O modules that operate with AC-power field devices
All PDMs distribute sensor and actuator power, provide PE resistance for the I/O modules they
support and provide over-current protection. Within each class are standard and basic PDM
models.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
5.1 STB PDT 2100 Standard 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module 320
5.2 STB PDT 2105 Basic 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module 332
5.3 STB PDT 3100 24 VDC Power Distribution Module 341
5.4 STB PDT 3105 24 VDC Basic Power Distribution Module 354

31007720 08/2016 319

Power Distribution Modules

Section 5.1
STB PDT 2100 Standard 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module

STB PDT 2100 Standard 115/230 VAC Power Distribution

Module

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the STB PDT 2100 PDM—its functions,
physical design, technical specifications, and power wiring requirements.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB PDT 2100 Physical Description 321
STB PDT 2100 LED Indicators 325
STB PDT 2100 Source Power Wiring 326
STB PDT 2100 Field Power Over-current Protection 328
Protective Earth Connection 330
STB PDT 2100 Specifications 331

320 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2100 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB PDT 2100 is a standard module that distributes field power independently over the
island’s sensor bus to the input modules and over the island’s actuator bus to the output modules.
This PDM mounts in a special size 2 base. It requires two AC power inputs from external power
source. Source power signals (either 115 VAC or 230 VAC) are brought into the PDM via a pair of
two-pin power connectors, one for sensor power and one for actuator power. The module also
houses two user-replaceable fuses that independently protect the island’s sensor power bus and
actuator power bus.
NOTE: If there is a mix of 115 VAC and 230 VAC modules in a segment, each voltage group needs
to be supported by a separate STB PDT 2100 PDM.

Front and Side Panel Views

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name

31007720 08/2016 321

Power Distribution Modules

3 LED array
4 red identification stripe, indicating an AC PDM
5 input field power connection receptacle (for the sensor bus)
6 output field power connection receptacle (for the actuator bus)
7 electric shock hazard symbol
8 PE captive screw clamp on the PDM base

The fuses for the sensor power and actuator power are housed in slots on the right side of the
module:

1 housing door for the 5 A sensor power fuse

2 housing door for the 10 A actuator power fuse
3 notches in the two doors
4 electric shock hazard statement
5 burn hazard statement

The two red plastic doors house a pair of fuses:

 a 5 A fuse protects the input modules on the island’s sensor bus
 a 10 A protects the output modules on the island’s actuator bus
If a fuse is blown, it can be replaced with a fuse from the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit.

322 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Remove power before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The marking on the side of the module describes a simple precaution you need to take before
replacing a fuse (see page 351) to prevent burns:

CAUTION
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB PDT 2100 K), which includes:
 one STB PDT 2100 power distribution module
 one STB XBA 2200 (see page 379) PDM base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 2-terminal screw type connectors, keying pins included
 two 2-terminal spring clamp connectors, keying pins included

 a 5 A, 250 V time-lag, low-breaking-capacity (glass) fuse to protect the input modules on the
island’s sensor bus
 a 10 A, 250 V time-lag, glass fuse to protect the output modules on the island’s actuator bus
Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB PDT 2100 power distribution module
 a standalone STB XBA 2200 (see page 367) PDM base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1130) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2130)
 the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit, which contains five 5 A replacement fuses and five 10 A
replacement fuses
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 kit for inserting the module into the base (to make sure that a DC PDM
(see page 320) is not inadvertently placed on the island where an STB PDT 2100 PDM
belongs)
 the STB XMP 7800 kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module

31007720 08/2016 323

Power Distribution Modules

For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base* 138 mm (5.43 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)
* PDMs are the tallest modules in an Advantys STB island segment. The 138 mm height
dimension includes the added height imposed by the PE captive screw clamp on the bottom
of the STB XBA 2200 base.

324 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2100 LED Indicators

Overview
The two LEDs on the STB PDT 2100 are visual indications of the presence of sensor power and
actuator power. The LED locations and their meanings are described below.

Location
Two yellow LEDs are located on the top front bezel of the module, directly below the model
number:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the two LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

IN OUT Meaning
on turns on at 70 VAC, indicating power for the sensor bus
off The module either:
 receiving less than 50 VAC
 has a blown fuse
 has failed

on turns on at 70 VAC, indicating power for the actuator bus

off The module either:
 receiving less than 50 VAC
 has a blown fuse
 has failed

NOTE: The power required to illuminate these LEDs comes from the AC power supplies that
provide the sensor bus and actuator bus power. These LED indicators operate regardless of
whether or not the NIM is transmitting logic power.

31007720 08/2016 325

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2100 Source Power Wiring

Summary
The STB PDT 2100 uses two two-pin power entry connectors that let you connect the PDM to one
or two AC field power source(s). Field power may be either 115 or 230 VAC. Source power for the
sensor bus is connected to the top connector, and source power for the actuator bus is connected
to the bottom connector. The choices of connector types and wire types are described below, and
a power wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 Two STB XTS 1130 screw type field wiring connectors
 Two STB XTS 2130 spring clamp field wiring connectors
Both connector types are provided in kits of 10 connectors/kit.
These power wiring connectors each have two connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between pins.

Power Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals can accept one power wire in the range 1.29 ... 2.03 mm2
(16 ... 12 AWG). When 1.29 mm2 (16 AWG) power wire is used, two wires can be connected to a
terminal.
We recommend that you strip at least 10 mm from the wire jackets to make the connections.

Safety Keying
NOTE: The same screw type and spring clamp connectors are used to deliver power to the
STB PDT 3100 PDM and to the STB PDT 2100 PDM. To avoid accidentally connecting VAC
power to a VDC module or vice versa, Schneider offers a kit of optional safety keying pins.
Refer the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171) for a detailed
discussion of keying strategies.

Power Wiring Pinout

The top connector receives AC source power for the sensor bus, and the bottom connector
receives AC source power for the actuator bus.

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +115/230 VAC for the sensor bus +115/230 VAC for the actuator bus
2 -115/230 VAC sensor power return -115/230 VAC actuator power return

326 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

This example shows the field power connections to both the sensor bus and the actuator bus
coming from an AC power source:

1 +AC sensor bus power

2 -AC sensor power return
3 +AC actuator bus power
4 -AC actuator power return

The diagram above shows a protection relay, which you may optionally place on the +AC power
wire to the actuator bus connector. A protection relay enables you to disable the output devices
receiving power from the actuator bus while you test the input devices that receive power from the
sensor bus. For a detailed discussion and some recommendations, refer to the Advantys STB
System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

31007720 08/2016 327

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2100 Field Power Over-current Protection

Fuse Requirements
Input modules on the sensor bus and output modules on the actuator bus are protected by fuses
in the STB PDT 2100 PDM. The sensor bus is protected by a 5 A fuse and the actuator bus is
protected by a 10 A fuse. These fuses are accessible and replaceable via two side panels on the
PDM.

Recommended Fuses
 Overcurrent protection for the input modules on the sensor bus needs to be provided by a 5 A
lag-time fuse such as the Wickmann 1951500000.
 Overcurrent protection for the output modules on the actuator bus needs to be provided by a
10 A lag-time fuse such as the Wickmann 1952100000.

Performance Considerations
When the island is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 degrees C (86 degrees F), the fuses
can pass 10 A continuously on the actuator bus and 5 A continuously on the sensor bus.
When the island is operating at an ambient temperature of 60 degrees C (140 degrees F), the
fuses can pass 5 A continuously on the actuator bus and 2.5 A continuously on the sensor bus.

Accessing the Fuse Panels

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Remove power before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The two panels that house the actuator bus protection fuse and the sensor bus protection fuse are
located on the right side of the PDM housing (see page 321). The panels are red doors with fuse
holders inside them. The 5 A sensor power fuse is in the top door. The 10 A actuator power fuse
is in the bottom door.

328 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Replacing a Fuse
Before you replace a fuse in the STB PDT 2100, you need to remove the power sources to the
actuator bus and sensor bus.

CAUTION
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Step Action Notes

1 After you have removed the power
connectors from the module and let the unit
cool down for 10 minutes, pull the PDM
from its base. Push the release buttons at
the top and bottom of the PDM and pull it
from the base.
2 Insert a small flathead screwdriver in the The slot is molded to protect the tip
slot on the left side of the fuse panel door of the screwdriver from accidentally
and use it to pop the door open. touching the fuse.
3 Remove the old fuse from the fuse holder If you are replacing one fuse with
inside the panel door, and replace it with another, make sure that the new
another fuse or with a fuse bypass plug. fuse is the same type as the old one.
4 Optionally, you may repeat steps 3 and 4 to
replace the fuse in the other panel.
5 Snap the panel door(s) shut and plug the
PDM back into its base. Then plug the
connectors back into the receptacles, close
the cabinet and reapply field power.

31007720 08/2016 329

Power Distribution Modules

Protective Earth Connection

PE Contact for the Island Bus

One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of PE to the island. On the bottom of each STB XBA 2200 PDM base is
a captive screw in a plastic block. By tightening this captive screw, you can make a PE contact with
the DIN rail. Every PDM base on the island bus should make PE contact.

How PE Contact Is Made

PE is brought to the island by a heavy-duty cross-sectional wire, usually a copper braided cable,
4.2 mm2 (10 gage) or larger. The wire needs to be tied to a single grounding point. The ground
conductor connects to the bottom of the each PDM base and is secured by the PE captive screw.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our PE wiring recommendations.

Handling Multiple PE Connections

It is possible that more than one PDM will be used on an island. Each PDM base on the island will
receive a ground conductor and distribute PE as described above.
NOTE: Tie the PE lines from more than one PDM to a single PE ground point in a star
configuration. This will minimize ground loops and excessive current from being created in PE
lines.
This illustration shows separate PE connections tied to a single PE ground:

1 the NIM
2 a PDM
3 another PDM
4 captive screws for the PE connections
5 FE connection on the DIN rail

330 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2100 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

The STB PDT 2100 module’s technical specifications are described in the following table.

description 115 or 230 VAC power distribution module

module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
module height in its base 137.9 mm (5.43 in)
PDM base STB XBA 2200
hot swapping supported no
nominal logic power current 0 mA
consumption
sensor/actuator bus voltage range 85 ... 264 VAC
AC sources should be the same phase reference
reverse polarity protection yes, on the actuator bus
module current for outputs 10 A rms max @ 30° C (86° F)
field
5 A rms max @ 60° C (140° F)
for inputs 5 A rms max @ 30° C (86° F)
2.5 A rms max @ 60° C (140° F)
overcurrent for inputs user-replaceable 5 A time-lag fuse from an STB XMP
protection 5600 fuse kit
for outputs user-replaceable 10 A time-lag fuse from an
STB XMP 5600 fuse kit
PE current 30 A for 2 min
voltage surge protection yes
status reporting to the two yellow sensor bus power present
LEDs
actuator bus power present
voltage-detect LED turns on 70 VAC (+/- 5 VAC)
threshold
LED turns off 50 VAC (+/- 5 VAC)
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature 0 to 60°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00

31007720 08/2016 331

Power Distribution Modules

Section 5.2
STB PDT 2105 Basic 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module

STB PDT 2105 Basic 115/230 VAC Power Distribution Module

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the STB PDT 2105 PDM—its functions,
physical design, technical specifications, and power wiring requirements.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB PDT 2105 Physical Description 333
STB PDT 2105 Source Power Wiring 337
STB PDT 2105 Protective Earth Connection 339
STB PDT 2105 Specifications 340

332 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2105 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB PDT 2105 is a basic module that distributes sensor power to the input modules and
actuator power to the output modules over a single power bus. This PDM mounts in a special size
2 base. It requires an AC power input from external 115 VAC or 230 VAC source, which is brought
into the PDM via a two-pin power connector. The module also houses a user-replaceable fuse that
protects the island’s I/O power bus.
NOTE: If there is a mix of 115 VAC and 230 VAC modules in a segment, each voltage group needs
to be supported by a separate AC power distribution module (either an STB PDT 2100 or another
STB PDT 2105).

Front and Side Panel Views

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 red identification stripe, indicating an AC PDM

31007720 08/2016 333

Power Distribution Modules

4 I/O field power connection

5 electric shock hazard symbol
6 PE captive screw clamp on the PDM base

The fuse for sensor and actuator power is housed in a slot on the right side of the module:

1 housing door for the 5 A fuse

2 this slot is not used
3 notches in the two doors
4 electric shock hazard statement
5 burn hazard statement

The 5 A fuse protects both the input and output modules. If the fuse blows, it can be replaced with
a fuse from the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit.

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Remove power before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

334 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

The marking on the side of the module describes a simple precaution you need to take before
replacing a fuse (see page 351) to prevent burns:

CAUTION
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB PDT 2105 K), which includes:
 one STB PDT 2105 power distribution module
 one STB XBA 2200 (see page 379) PDM base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 one 2-terminal screw type connector, keying pins included
 one 2-terminal spring clamp connector, keying pins included

 a 5 A, 250 V time-lag, low-breaking-capacity (glass) fuse to protect the input modules on the
island’s sensor bus
 a 10 A, 250 V time-lag, glass fuse to protect the output modules on the island’s actuator bus
Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB PDT 2105 power distribution module
 a standalone STB XBA 2200 (see page 367) PDM base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1130) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2130)
 the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit, which contains five 5 A replacement fuses and five 10 A
replacement fuses
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 kit for inserting the module into the base (to make sure that an AC PDM
(see page 320) is not inadvertently placed on the island where an STB PDT 2105 PDM
belongs)
 the STB XMP 7800 kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
Additional optional accessories include:
 STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the base
as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 kit for inserting the module into the base (to make sure that a DC PDM is
not inadvertently placed on the island where an STB PDT 2105 PDM belongs)
 the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit, which contains five 5 A replacement fuses and five 10 A
replacement fuses

31007720 08/2016 335

Power Distribution Modules

NOTE: Do not use the 10 A fuses in the STB PDT 3105 module.
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base* 138 mm (5.43 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)
* PDMs are the tallest modules in an Advantys STB island segment. The 138 mm height
dimension includes the added height imposed by the PE captive screw clamp on the bottom
of the STB XBA 2200 base.

336 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2105 Source Power Wiring

Summary
The STB PDT 2105 uses a two-pin power entry connector that let you connect the PDM to an AC
field power source. Field power may be either 115 or 230 VAC. The choices of connector types
and wire types are described below, and a power wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use either:
 an STB XTS 1130 screw type field wiring connector
 an STB XTS 2130 spring clamp field wiring connector
Both connector types are provided in kits of 10 connectors/kit.
These power wiring connectors each have two connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between pins.

Power Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals can accept one power wire in the range 1.29 ... 2.03 mm2
(16 ... 12 AWG). When 1.29 mm2 (16 AWG) power wire is used, two wires can be connected to a
terminal.
We recommend that you strip at least 10 mm from the wire jackets to make the connections.

Safety Keying
NOTE: The same screw type and spring clamp connectors are used to deliver power to a 24 VDC
PDM (an STB PDT 3100 or anSTB_PDT 3105) and to the STB PDT 2105 PDM. To avoid
accidentally connecting AC power to a DC module or vice versa, Schneider offers a kit of optional
safety keying pins.
Refer the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171) for a detailed
discussion of keying strategies.

Power Wiring Pinout

The connector receives AC source power for the sensor bus, and the bottom connector receives
AC source power for the actuator bus.

Pin Connection
1 +115/230 VAC field power
2 -115/230 VAC return

31007720 08/2016 337

Power Distribution Modules

Sample Wiring Diagram

This example shows the field power connection coming from an AC power source:

1 +AC sensor bus power

2 -AC sensor power return

For a detailed discussion and some recommendations, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning
and Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

338 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2105 Protective Earth Connection

PE Contact for the Island Bus

One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of PE to the island. On the bottom of each STB XBA 2200 PDM base is
a captive screw in a plastic block. By tightening this captive screw, you can make a PE contact with
the DIN rail. Every PDM base on the island bus should make PE contact.

How PE Contact Is Made

PE is brought to the island by a heavy-duty cross-sectional wire, usually a copper braided cable,
4.2 mm2 (10 gauge) or larger. The wire needs to be tied to a single grounding point. The ground
conductor connects to the bottom of the each PDM base and is secured by the PE captive screw.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our PE wiring recommendations.

Handling Multiple PE Connections

It is possible that more than one PDM will be used on an island. Each PDM base on the island will
receive a ground conductor and distribute PE as described above.
NOTE: Tie the PE lines from more than one PDM to a single PE ground point in a star
configuration. This will minimize ground loops and excessive current from being created in PE
lines.
This illustration shows separate PE connections tied to a single PE ground:

1 the NIM
2 a PDM
3 another PDM
4 captive screws for the PE connections
5 FE connection on the DIN rail

31007720 08/2016 339

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 2105 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description 115 or 230 VAC power distribution module

module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
module height in its base 137.9 mm (5.43 in)
PDM base STB XBA 2200
hot swapping supported no
nominal logic power current 0 mA
consumption
I/O power bus voltage range 85 ... 265 VAC
AC sources should be the same phase reference
reverse polarity protection yes
module current field 4 A max
overcurrent protection for sensor user-replaceable 5 A time-lag fuse
and actuator power
one fuse ships with the PDM; replacements are
available in an STB XMP 5600 fuse kit
PE current 30 A for 2 min
voltage surge protection yes
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature 0 to 60°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00

340 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Section 5.3
STB PDT 3100 24 VDC Power Distribution Module

STB PDT 3100 24 VDC Power Distribution Module

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the STB PDT 3100 PDM—its functions,
physical design, technical specifications, and power wiring requirements.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB PDT 3100 Physical Description 342
STB PDT 3100 LED Indicators 346
STB PDT 3100 Source Power Wiring 347
STB PDT 3100 Field Power Over-current Fuses 350
The Protective Earth Connection 352
STB PDT 3100 Specifications 353

31007720 08/2016 341

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3100 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB PDT 3100 is a standard module that distributes field power independently over the
island’s sensor bus to the input modules and over the island’s actuator bus to the output modules.
This PDM requires two DC power inputs from an external power source. 24 VDC source power
signals are brought into the PDM via a pair of two-pin power connectors, one for sensor power and
one for actuator power. The module also houses two user-replaceable fuses that independently
help protect the island’s sensor power bus and actuator power bus.

Front and Side Panel Views

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 LED array
4 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a DC PDM
5 input field power connection receptacle (for the sensor bus)
6 output field power connection receptacle (for the actuator bus)
7 PE captive screw clamp on the PDM base

342 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

The fuses for the sensor power and actuator power are housed in slots on the right side of the
module:

1 housing door for the 5 A sensor power fuse

2 housing door for the 10 A actuator power fuse
3 notches in the two doors
4 burn hazard statement

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
 Ensure all power supplies are switched off, locked out and tagged out before
separating/assembling, connecting/disconnecting equipment.
 Ensure the surrounding area is non hazardous before separating/assembling,
connecting/disconnecting equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

31007720 08/2016 343

Power Distribution Modules

WARNING
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The two red plastic doors house a pair of fuses:

 a 5 A fuse helps protect the input modules on the island’s sensor bus
 a 10 A helps protect the output modules on the island’s actuator bus
Follow the instructions on the side of the module when replacing a fuse (see page 351).

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB PDT 3100 K), which includes:
 one STB PDT 3100 power distribution module
 one STB XBA 2200 (see page 379) PDM base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 two 2-terminal screw type connectors, keying pins included
 two 2-terminal spring clamp connectors, keying pins included

 a 5 A, 250 V time-lag, low-breaking-capacity (glass) fuse to help protect the input modules on
the island’s sensor bus
 a 10 A, 250 V time-lag, glass fuse to help protect the output modules on the island’s actuator
bus
Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB PDT 3100 power distribution module
 a standalone STB XBA 2200 PDM base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1130) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2130)
 the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit, which contains five 5 A replacement fuses and five 10 A
replacement fuses
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 kit for inserting the module into the base (to check that an AC PDM is not
inadvertently placed on the island where an STB PDT 3100 PDM belongs)
 the STB XMP 7800 kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

344 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base* 138 mm (5.43 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)
* PDMs are the tallest modules in an Advantys STB island segment. The 138 mm height
dimension includes the added height imposed by the PE captive screw clamp on the bottom
of the STB XBA 2200 base.

31007720 08/2016 345

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3100 LED Indicators

Overview
The two LEDs on the STB PDT 3100 are visual indications of the presence of sensor power and
actuator power. The LED locations and their meanings are described below.

Location
The two LEDs are located on the top front bezel of the module, directly below the model number:

Indications
The following table defines the meaning of the two LEDs (where an empty cell indicates that the
pattern on the associated LED doesn’t matter):

IN OUT Meaning
on sensor (input) field power is present
off The module either:
 is not receiving sensor field power
 has a blown fuse
 has stopped functioning

on actuator (output) field power is present

off The module either:
 is not receiving sensor field power
 has a blown fuse
 has stopped functioning

NOTE: The power required to illuminate these LEDs comes from the 24 VDC power supplies that
provide the sensor bus and actuator bus power. These LED indicators operate regardless of
whether or not the NIM is transmitting logic power.

346 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3100 Source Power Wiring

Summary
The STB PDT 3100 uses two two-pin source power connectors that let you connect the PDM to
one or two 24 VDC field power source(s). Source power for the sensor bus is connected to the top
connector, and source power for the actuator bus is connected to the bottom connector. The
choices of connector types and wire types are described below, and a power wiring example is
presented.

Connectors
Use a set of either:
 Two STB XTS 1130 screw type field wiring connectors
 Two STB XTS 2130 spring clamp field wiring connectors
Both connector types are provided in kits of 10 connectors/kit.
These power wiring connectors each have two connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between pins.

Power Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals can accept one power wire in the range 1.29 ... 2.03 mm2
(16 ... 12 AWG). When 1.29 mm2 (16 AWG) power wire is used, two wires can be connected to a
terminal.
We recommend that you strip at least 10 mm from the wire jackets to make the connections.

Safety Keying
NOTE: The same screw type and spring clamp connectors are used to deliver power to the
STB PDT 3100 PDM and to the STB PDT 2100 PDM. To help avoid connecting VAC power to a
VDC module or vice versa, Schneider offers an optional STB XMP 7810 safety keying pin kit for
the PDMs.
Refer the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171) for a detailed
discussion of keying strategies.

Power Wiring Pinout

The top connector receives 24 VDC source power for the sensor bus, and the bottom connector
receives 24 VDC source power for the actuator bus.

Pin Top Connector Bottom Connector

1 +24 VDC for the sensor bus +24 VDC for the sensor bus
2 -24 VDC sensor power return -24 VDC actuator power return

31007720 08/2016 347

Power Distribution Modules

Source Power
The STB PDT 3100 PDM requires source power from at least one independent, SELV-rated
19.2 ... 30 VDC power supply.
Sensor power and actuator power are isolated from one another on the island. You may provide
source power to these two buses via a single power supply or by two separate power supplies.
Refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171) for a detailed
discussion of external power supply selection considerations.

Sample Wiring Diagrams

This example shows the field power connections to both the sensor bus and the actuator bus
coming from a single 24 VDC SELV power supply.

1 +24 VDC sensor bus power

2 -24 VDC sensor power return
3 +24 VDC actuator bus power
4 -24 VDC actuator power return

The diagram above shows a protection relay, which you may optionally place on the +24 VDC
power wire to the actuator bus connector. A protection relay enables you to disable the output
devices receiving power from the actuator bus while you test the input devices that receive power
from the sensor bus. For a detailed discussion and some recommendations, refer to the Advantys
STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

348 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

This example shows field power for the sensor bus and field power for the actuator bus being
derived from separate SELV power supply sources.

1 +24 VDC sensor bus power

2 24 VDC sensor power return
3 +24 VDC actuator bus power
4 -24 VDC actuator power return

An optional protection relay is shown on the +24 VDC power wire to the actuator bus connector.

31007720 08/2016 349

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3100 Field Power Over-current Fuses

Fuse Requirements
The STB PDT 3100 PDM includes fuses that help protect input modules on the sensor bus and
output modules on the actuator bus. The fuses are:
 a 5 A fuse on the sensor bus
 a 10 A fuse on the actuator bus

These fuses are accessible and replaceable via two side panels on the PDM.

Recommended Fuses
 Overcurrent protection for the input modules on the sensor bus needs to be provided by a 5 A
time-lag fuse such as the Wickmann 1951500000.
 Overcurrent protection for the output modules on the actuator bus needs to be provided by a
10 A time-lag fuse such as the Wickmann 1952100000.

Performance Considerations
The maximum combined module current - the sum of actuator current and sensor current -
depends upon the island’s ambient temperature, as displayed in the following diagram:
Maximum Current (A) to Temperature (°C)

For example:
 At 60 °C, total maximum combined module current is 8 A.
 At 45 °C, total maximum combined module current is 10 A.
 At 30 °C, total maximum combined module current is 12 A.
At any temperature, the maximum actuator current is 8 A, and the maximum sensor current is 4 A.

350 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Accessing the Fuse Panels

The two panels that house the actuator bus protection fuse and the sensor bus protection fuse are
located on the right side of the PDM housing (see page 342). The panels are red doors with fuse
holders inside them. The 5 A sensor power fuse is in the top door. The 10 A actuator power fuse
is in the bottom door.

Replacing a Fuse

WARNING
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Before you replace a fuse in the STB PDT 3100, remove the power sources to the actuator bus
and sensor bus.

Step Action Notes

1 After you have removed the power
connectors from the module and let the unit
cool down for 10 minutes, pull the PDM
from its base. Push the release buttons at
the top and bottom of the PDM and pull it
from the base.
2 Insert a small flathead screwdriver in the The slot is molded to reduce the
slot on the left of the fuse panel door and likelihood that the tip of the
use it to pop the door open. screwdriver accidentally touches the
fuse.
3 Remove the old fuse from the fuse holder Check that the new fuse is the same
inside the panel door, and replace it with type as the old one.
another fuse or with a fuse bypass plug.
4 Optionally, you may repeat steps 3 and 4 to
replace the fuse in the other panel.
5 Snap the panel door(s) shut and plug the
PDM back into its base. Then plug the
connectors back into the receptacles, close
the cabinet and reapply field power.

31007720 08/2016 351

Power Distribution Modules

The Protective Earth Connection

PE Contact for the Island

One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of protective earth (PE) to the island. On the bottom of each
STB XBA 2200 PDM base is a captive screw in a plastic block. By tightening this captive screw,
you can make a PE contact with the island bus. Every PDM base on the island bus should make
PE contact.

How PE Contact Is Made

PE is brought to the island by a heavy-duty cross-sectional wire, usually a copper braided cable,
4.2 mm2 (10 gage) or larger. The wire needs to be tied to a single grounding point. The ground
conductor connects to the bottom of the each PDM base and is secured by the PE captive screw.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our PE wiring recommendations.

Handling Multiple PE Connections

It is possible that more than one PDM will be used on an island. Each PDM base on the island will
receive a ground conductor and distribute PE as described above.
NOTE: Tie the PE lines from more than one PDM to a single PE ground point in a star
configuration. This will minimize ground loops and excessive current from being created in PE
lines.
This illustration shows separate PE connections tied to a single PE ground:

1 the NIM
2 a PDM
3 another PDM
4 captive screws for the PE connections
5 FE connection on the DIN rail

352 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3100 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

The STB PDT 3100 module’s technical specifications are described in the following table.

description 24 VDC power distribution module

module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
module height in its base 137.9 mm (5.43 in)
PDM base STB XBA 2200
hot swapping supported no
nominal logic power current 0 mA
consumption
sensor/actuator bus voltage range 19.2 ... 30 VDC
reverse polarity protection yes, on the actuator bus
module current for outputs 8 A rms max @ 30° C (86° F)
field
5 A rms max @ 60° C (140° F)
for inputs 4 A rms max @ 30° C (86° F)
2.5 A rms max @ 60° C (140° F)
overcurrent for inputs user-replaceable 5 A time-lag fuse from an STB XMP
protection 5600 fuse kit
for outputs user-replaceable 10 A time-lag fuse from an
STB XMP 5600 fuse kit
bus current 0 mA
voltage surge protection yes
PE current 30 A for 2 min
status reporting to the two green sensor bus power present
LEDs
actuator bus power present
voltage-detect LED turns on at 15 VDC (+/- 1 VDC)
threshold
LED turns off less than15 VDC (+/- 1 VDC)
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature range* 0 to 60°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00
*This product supports operation at normal and extended temperature ranges. Refer to the
Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00 for a complete
summary of capabilities and limitations.

31007720 08/2016 353

Power Distribution Modules

Section 5.4
STB PDT 3105 24 VDC Basic Power Distribution Module

STB PDT 3105 24 VDC Basic Power Distribution Module

Overview
This section provides you with a detailed description of the STB PDT 3105 PDM—its functions,
physical design, technical specifications, and power wiring requirements.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
STB PDT 3105 Physical Description 355
STB PDT 3105 Source Power Wiring 359
STB PDT 3105 Field Power Over-current Fuses 361
STB PDT 3105 Protective Earth Connection 363
STB PDT 3105 Specifications 364

354 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3105 Physical Description

Physical Characteristics
The STB PDT 3105 is a basic Advantys STB module that distributes sensor power and actuator
power over a single power bus to the I/O modules in a segment. This PDM mounts in a special size
2 base. It requires a 24 VDC source power input from an external power source, which is brought
into the PDM via a two-pin power connector. The module also houses a user-replaceable fuse that
helps protect the island’s I/O power bus.

Front and Side Panel Views

1 locations for the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable labels

2 model name
3 dark blue identification stripe, indicating a DC PDM
4 I/O field power connection
5 PE captive screw clamp on the PDM base

31007720 08/2016 355

Power Distribution Modules

The following illustration shows the right side of the module, where the user-replaceable fuse is
housed:

1 housing door for the 5 A fuse

2 this slot is not used
3 notches in the two doors
4 burn hazard statement

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
 Ensure all power supplies are switched off, locked out and tagged out before
separating/assembling, connecting/disconnecting equipment.
 Ensure the surrounding area is non hazardous before separating/assembling,
connecting/disconnecting equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

356 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

Follow the instructions on the side of the module when you are replacing a fuse (see page 351):

WARNING
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Ordering Information
The module can be ordered as part of a kit (STB PDT 3105 K), which includes:
 one STB PDT 3105 power distribution module
 one STB XBA 2200 (see page 379) PDM base
 two alternative sets of connectors:
 one 2-terminal screw type connector, keying pins included
 one 2-terminal spring clamp connector, keying pins included

 a 5 A, 250 V time-lag, low-breaking-capacity (glass) fuse to help protect the input and output
modules
Individual parts may also be ordered for stock or replacement as follows:
 a standalone STB PDT 3105 power distribution module
 a standalone STB XBA 2200 PDM base
 a bag of screw type connectors (STB XTS 1130) or spring clamp connectors (STB XTS 2130)
 the STB XMP 5600 fuse kit, which contains five 5 A replacement fuses and five 10 A
replacement fuses
NOTE: Do not use the 10 A fuses in the STB PDT 3105 module.
Additional optional accessories are also available:
 the STB XMP 6700 user-customizable label kit, which may be applied to the module and the
base as part of your island assembly plan
 the STB XMP 7700 kit for inserting the module into the base (to check that an AC PDM
(see page 320) is not inadvertently placed on the island where an STB PDT 3105 PDM
belongs)
 the STB XMP 7800 kit for inserting the field wiring connectors into the module
For installation instructions and other details, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

31007720 08/2016 357

Power Distribution Modules

Dimensions

width module on a base 18.4 mm (0.72 in

height module only 125 mm (4.92 in)
on a base* 138 mm (5.43 in)
depth module only 65.1 mm (2.56 in)
on a base, with connectors 75.5 mm (2.97 in) worst case (with screw
clamp connectors)
* PDMs are the tallest modules in an Advantys STB island segment. The 138 mm height
dimension includes the added height imposed by the PE captive screw clamp on the bottom
of the STB XBA 2200 base.

358 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3105 Source Power Wiring

Summary
The STB PDT 3105 uses a two-pin source power connector that let you connect the PDM to a
24 VDC field power source. The choices of connector types and wire types are described below,
and a power wiring example is presented.

Connectors
Use either:
 an STB XTS 1130 screw type field wiring connector
 an STB XTS 2130 spring clamp field wiring connector
Both connector types are provided in kits of 10 connectors/kit.
These power wiring connectors each have two connection terminals, with a 5.08 mm (0.2 in) pitch
between pins.

Power Wire Requirements

Individual connector terminals can accept one power wire in the range 1.29 ... 2.03 mm2
(16 ... 12 AWG). When 1.29 mm2 (16 AWG) power wire is used, two wires can be connected to a
terminal.
We recommend that you strip at least 10 mm from the wire jackets to make the connections.

Safety Keying
NOTE: The same screw type and spring clamp connectors are used to deliver power to the
STB PDT 3105 PDM and to the STB PDT 2100 and STB PDT 2105 PDMs. To help avoid
connecting VAC power to a VDC module or vice versa, Schneider offers an optional
STB XMP 7810 safety keying pin kit for the PDMs.
Refer the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171) for a detailed
discussion of keying strategies.

Power Wiring Pinout

The connector receives 24 VDC source power for the sensor bus, and the bottom connector
receives 24 VDC source power for the actuator bus.

Pin Connection
1 +24 VDC I/O power
2 -24 VDC return

31007720 08/2016 359

Power Distribution Modules

Source Power
The STB PDT 3105 PDM requires source power from an independent, SELV-rated
19.2 ... 30 VDC power supply. Refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and Installation Guide
(890 USE 171) for a detailed discussion of external power supply selection considerations.

Sample Wiring Diagrams

This example shows the field power connections to both the sensor bus and the actuator bus
coming from a single 24 VDC SELV power supply.

1 +24 VDC I/O power

2 -24 VDC return

For a detailed discussion and some recommendations, refer to the Advantys STB System Planning
and Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

360 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3105 Field Power Over-current Fuses

Fuse Requirements
The STB PDT 3105 PDM includes a 5 A fuse that helps to protect the I/O modules. The fuse is
accessible and replaceable via a side panel on the PDM.

Recommended Fuses
Overcurrent protection for the input and output modules on the island bus needs to be provided by
a 5 A time-lag fuse such as the Wickmann 1951500000.

Performance Considerations
When the island is operating at an ambient temperature of 60 degrees C (140 degrees F), the fuse
can pass 4 A continuously.

Accessing the Fuse Panels

Two panels are located on the right side of the PDM housing (see page 355). The top panel houses
the active protection fuse and the other is not used. The top panel has a fuse holder inside it.

Replacing a Fuse

WARNING
BURN HAZARD - HOT FUSE
Disconnect power for 10 minutes before removing fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Before you replace a fuse in the STB PDT 3105, remove the power source.

Step Action Notes

1 After you have removed the power
connector from the module and let the unit
cool down for 10 minutes, pull the PDM
from its base. Push the release buttons at
the top and bottom of the PDM and pull it
from the base.
2 Insert a small flathead screwdriver in the The slot is molded to reduce the
slot on the left of the fuse panel door and likelihood that the tip of the
use it to pop the door open. screwdriver accidentally touches the
fuse.

31007720 08/2016 361

Power Distribution Modules

Step Action Notes

3 Remove the old fuse from the fuse holder Check that the new fuse is a 5 A fuse.
inside the panel door, and replace it with Note 10 A fuses are provided in the
another fuse. fuse kit, but they should not be used
with an STB PDT 3105 module.
4 Snap the panel door(s) shut and plug the
PDM back into its base. Then plug the
connectors back into the receptacles,
close the cabinet and reapply field power.

362 31007720 08/2016

 Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3105 Protective Earth Connection

PE Contact for the Island Bus

One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of PE to the island. On the bottom of each STB XBA 2200 PDM base is
a captive screw in a plastic block. By tightening this captive screw, you can make a PE contact with
the DIN rail. Every PDM base on the island bus should make PE contact.

How PE Contact Is Made

PE is brought to the island by a heavy-duty cross-sectional wire, usually a copper braided cable,
4.2 mm2 (10 gauge) or larger. The wire needs to be tied to a single grounding point. The ground
conductor connects to the bottom of the each PDM base and is secured by the PE captive screw.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our PE wiring recommendations.

Handling Multiple PE Connections

It is possible that more than one PDM will be used on an island. Each PDM base on the island will
receive a ground conductor and distribute PE as described above.
NOTE: Tie the PE lines from more than one PDM to a single PE ground point in a star
configuration. This will minimize ground loops and excessive current from being created in PE
lines.
This illustration shows separate PE connections tied to a single PE ground:

1 the NIM
2 a PDM
3 another PDM
4 captive screws for the PE connections
5 FE connection on the DIN rail

31007720 08/2016 363

Power Distribution Modules

STB PDT 3105 Specifications

Table of Technical Specifications

description basic 24 VDC power distribution module

module width 18.4 mm (0.72 in)
module height in its base 137.9 mm (5.43 in)
PDM base STB XBA 2200
hot swapping supported no
nominal logic power current 0 mA
consumption
I/O power bus voltage range 19.2 ... 30 VDC
reverse polarity protection on the outputs only
module current field 4 A max
overcurrent protection for sensor user-replaceable 5 A time-lag fuse
and actuator power
one fuse ships with the PDM; replacements are
available in an STB XMP 5600 fuse kit
bus current 0 mA
voltage surge protection yes
PE current 30 A for 2 min
storage temperature -40 to 85°C
operating temperature 0 to 60°C
agency certifications refer to the Advantys STB System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 171 00

364 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Bases
31007720 08/2016

Chapter 6
STB Module Bases

STB Module Bases

Overview
The physical communications bus that supports the island is constructed by interconnecting a
series of base units and snapping them on a DIN rail. Different Advantys modules require different
types of bases. Install bases in the proper sequence as you construct the island bus. This chapter
provides you with a description of each base type.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Advantys Bases 366
STB XBA 1000 I/O Base 367
STB XBA 2000 I/O Base 371
STB XBA 3000 I/O Base 375
STB XBA 2200 PDM Base 379
The Protective Earth Connection 383

31007720 08/2016 365

Bases

Advantys Bases

Summary
There are six different base units. When interconnected on a DIN rail, these bases form the
physical backplane onto which the Advantys modules are mounted. This physical backplane also
supports the transmission of power, communications and PE across the island bus.

Base Models
The table below lists the bases by model number, size and types of Advantys modules that they
support.

Base Model Width Modules Supported

STB XBA 1000 13.9 mm (0.58 in) size 1 Advantys input and output modules
(see page 367)
STB XBA 2000 18.4 mm (0.72 in) size 2 Advantys input and output modules and the
(see page 371) STB XBE 2100 CANopen extension module
STB XBA 2200 18.4 mm (0.72 in) All Advantys PDM modules
(see page 379)
STB XBA 2300 18.4 mm (0.72 in) STB XBE 1200 BOS island bus extension
(see Advantys modules
STB, Special
Modules,
Reference Guide)
STB XBA 2400 18.4 mm (0.72 in) STB XBE 1000 EOS island bus extension
modules
STB XBA 3000 27.8 mm (1.09 in) size 3 Advantys specialty modules
(see page 375)

NOTE: You should insert the correct base in each location on the island bus to support the desired
module type. Notice that there are three different size 2 (18.4 mm) bases. Check that you choose
and install the correct one at each position on the island bus.

366 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

STB XBA 1000 I/O Base

Summary
The STB XBA 1000 I/O base is 13.9 mm (0.58 in) wide. It provides the physical connections for a
size 1 input or output module on the island bus. These connections let you communicate with the
NIM over the island bus and hot swap the module when the island bus is operational. They also
enable the module to receive:
 logic power from the NIM or from a BOS module
 sensor power (for inputs) or actuator power (for outputs) from the PDM

Physical Overview
The following illustration shows some of the key components an STB XBA 1000 base:

1 user-customizable label tab

2 six island bus contacts
3 DIN rail lock/release latch
4 DIN rail contact
5 five field power distribution contacts

31007720 08/2016 367

Bases

The Label Tab

A label can be positioned on the tab shown above in item 1. The label helps identify the specific
module that will reside at this base unit’s island bus location. A similar label can be placed on the
module itself so that they can be matched up properly during the island installation.
Labels are provided on an STB XMP 6700 marking label sheet, which can be ordered from your
Schneider Electric service provider.

The Island Bus Contacts

The six contacts located at the top left side of the STB XBA 1000 base provide logic power and
island bus communications connections between the module and the island bus:

In the primary segment of the island bus, the signals that make these contacts come from the NIM.
In extension segments, these signals come from an STB XBE 1000 BOS extension module:

Contacts Signals
1 not used
2 the common ground contact
3 the 5 VDC logic power signal generated by the power supply in either the NIM
(in the primary segment) or a BOS module (in an extension segment)
4 and 5 used for communications across the island bus between the I/O and the NIM—
contact 4 is positive (+ve), and contact 5 is negative (-ve).
6 connects the module in the base to the island’s address line. The NIM uses the
address line to validate that the expected module is located at each physical
address.

368 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

The Lock/ Release Latch

The latch in the center front of the STB XBA 1000 base has two positions, as shown below:
Release position

Lock position

The latch needs to be in release position while the base is being inserted on the DIN rail and when
it is being removed from the DIN rail. It needs to be in lock position when the base has been pushed
and snapped into place on the rail before the module is inserted into the base.

The DIN Rail Contacts

One of the functions of the DIN rail is to provide the island with functional earth. Functional earth
provides the island with noise immunity control and RFI/EMI protection.
When an I/O base is snapped onto the DIN rail, two contacts on the back of the rail provide the
earth ground connection between the rail and the I/O module that will be seated on the base.

31007720 08/2016 369

Bases

The Field Power Distribution Contacts

The five contacts located in a column at the bottom of the STB XBA 1000 I/O base provide field
power and a protective earth (PE) connections to the I/O module:

Field power (sensor power for inputs and actuator power for outputs) is distributed across the
island bus to the STB XBA 1000 bases by a PDM:

Contacts Signals
1 and 2 when the module inserted in the base has input channels, contacts 1 and 2
deliver sensor bus power to the module
3 and 4 when the module inserted in the base has output channels, contacts 3 and 4
deliver actuator bus power to the module
5 PE is established via a captive screw on the PDM base units (see page 383) and
is delivered to the Advantys STB I/O module via contact 5

If the module in the STB XBA 1000 base supports only input channels, contacts 3 and 4 are not
used. If the module in the STB XBA 1000 base supports only output channels, contacts 1 and 2
are not used.

370 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

STB XBA 2000 I/O Base

Summary
The STB XBA 2000 I/O base is 18.4 mm (0.72 in) wide. It provides the physical connections for a
size 2 input or output module on the island bus. These connections let you communicate with the
NIM over the island bus and hot swap the module when the island bus is operational. They also
enable the module to receive:
 logic power from the NIM or from a BOS module
 sensor power (for inputs) or actuator power (for outputs) from the PDM
The base also support an STB XBE 2100 CANopen extension module on the island bus.
NOTE: The STB XBA 2000 is designed only for the size 2 modules described above. Do not use
this base for other size 2 Advantys modules such as the PDMs, EOS modules or BOS modules.

Physical Overview
The following illustration shows some of the key components an STB XBA 2000 base:

1 user-customizable label tab

2 six island bus contacts
3 DIN rail lock/release latch
4 DIN rail contact
5 five field power distribution contacts

31007720 08/2016 371

Bases

The Label Tab

A label can be positioned on the tab shown above in item 1. The label helps identify the specific
module that will reside at this base unit’s island bus location. A similar label can be placed on the
module itself so that they can be matched up properly during the island installation.
Labels are provided on an STB XMP 6700 marking label sheet, which can be ordered from your
Schneider Electric service provider.

The Island Bus Contacts

The six contacts located in a column at the top of the I/O base provide logic power and island bus
communications connections between the module and the island bus:

In the primary segment of the island bus, the signals that make these contacts come from the NIM.
In extension segments, these signals come from an STB XBE 1000 BOS extension module:

Contacts Signals
1 not used
2 the common ground contact
3 the 5 VDC logic power signal generated by the power supply in either the NIM
(in the primary segment) or a BOS module (in an extension segment)
4 and 5 used for communications across the island bus between the I/O and the NIM—
contact 4 is positive (+ve), and contact 5 is negative (-ve).
6 connects the module in the base to the island’s address line. The NIM uses the
address line to validate that the expected module is located at each physical
address.

372 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

The Lock/Release Latch

The latch in the center front of the STB XBA 2000 base has two positions, as shown below:
Release position

Lock position

The latch needs to be in release position while the base is being inserted on the DIN rail and when
it is being removed from the DIN rail. It needs to be in lock position when the base has been pushed
and snapped into place on the rail before the module is inserted into the base.

The DIN Rail Contacts

One of the functions of the DIN rail is to provide the island with functional earth. Functional earth
provides the island with noise immunity control and RFI/EMI protection.
When an I/O base is snapped onto the DIN rail, two contacts on the back of the rail provide the
earth ground connection between the rail and the I/O module that will be seated on the base.

31007720 08/2016 373

Bases

The Field Power Distribution Contacts

The five contacts located in a column at the bottom of the STB XBA 2000 base provide AC or DC
field power and a protective earth (PE) connections to the I/O module. They are as follows:

Field power (sensor power for inputs and actuator power for outputs) is distributed across the
island bus to the STB PDT 2100 PDM:

Contacts Signals
1 and 2 when the module inserted in the base has input channels, contacts 1 and 2
deliver sensor bus power to the module
3 and 4 when the module inserted in the base has output channels, contacts 3 and 4
deliver actuator bus power to the module
5 PE is established via a captive screw on the PDM base units (see page 383) and
is delivered to the Advantys STB I/O module via contact 5

If the module in the STB XBA 2000 base supports only input channels, contacts 3 and 4 are not
used. If the module in the STB XBA 1000 base supports only output channels, contacts 1 and 2
are not used.

374 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

STB XBA 3000 I/O Base

Summary
The STB XBA 3000 I/O base is 27.8 mm (1.1 in) wide. provides the physical connections for a
size 3 input and output module on the island bus. These connections let you communicate with the
NIM over the island bus and hot swap the module when the island bus is operational. They also
enable the module to receive:
 logic power from the NIM or from a BOS module
 sensor power (for inputs) or actuator power (for outputs) from the PDM

Physical Overview
The following illustration shows some of the key components an STB XBA 3000 base:

1 six island bus contacts

2 size 3 security pin
3 DIN rail lock/release latches
4 DIN rail contacts
5 five field power distribution contacts

31007720 08/2016 375

Bases

The Island Bus Contacts

The six contacts located in a column at the top of the I/O base provide logic power (see page 24)
and island bus communications connections between the module and the island backplane. They
are as follows:

In the primary segment of the island bus, the signals that make these contacts come from the NIM.
In extension segments, these signals come from an STB XBE 1000 BOS extension module:

Contacts Signals
1 not used
2 the common ground contact
3 the 5 VDC logic power signal generated by the power supply in either the NIM
(in the primary segment) or a BOS module (in an extension segment)
4 and 5 used for communications across the island bus between the I/O and the NIM—
contact 4 is positive (+ve), and contact 5 is negative (-ve).
6 connects the module in the base to the island’s address line. The NIM uses the
address line to validate that the expected module is located at each physical
address.

The Size 3 Module Security Pin

The STB XBA 3000 I/O base looks very much like a pair of interlocked STB XBA 1000 I/O bases.
It is designed, however, to house only size 3 I/O modules. The security pin located in the center
front of the base above the two lock/release latches reduces the likelihood you will inadvertently
install two size 1 modules in the base.

376 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

The Lock/Release Latch

Two latches in the center front of the STB XBA 3000 base each have two positions, as shown
below:
Release positions

Lock positions

The latches need to be in their release positions while the base is being inserted on the DIN rail
and when it is being removed from the DIN rail. They need to be in their lock positions when the
base has been pushed and snapped into place on the rail before the module is inserted into the
base.

31007720 08/2016 377

Bases

The DIN Rail Contacts

One of the functions of the DIN rail is to provide the island with functional earth. Functional earth
provides the island with noise immunity control and RFI/EMI protection.
When an STB XBA 3000 I/O base is snapped onto the DIN rail, four contacts on the back of the
rail provide functional ground connections between the rail and the I/O module that will be seated
on the base.

The Field Power Distribution Contacts

The five contacts located in a column at the bottom of the STB XBA 3000 base provide field power
and protective earth (PE) connections to the I/O module. They are as follows:

Field power (sensor power for inputs and actuator power for outputs) is distributed across the
island bus to the STB XBA 3000 bases by a PDM:

Contacts Signals
1 and 2 when the module inserted in the base has input channels, contacts 1 and 2
deliver sensor bus power to the module
3 and 4 when the module inserted in the base has output channels, contacts 3 and 4
deliver actuator bus power to the module
5 PE is established via a captive screw on the PDM base units (see page 383) and
is delivered to the Advantys STB I/O module via contact 5

If the module in the STB XBA 3000 base supports only input channels, contacts 3 and 4 are not
used. If the module in the STB XBA 1000 base supports only output channels, contacts 1 and 2
are not used.

378 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

STB XBA 2200 PDM Base

Summary
The STB XBA 2200 PDM base is 18.4 mm (0.72 in) wide. It is the mounting connection for any
PDM(s) on the island bus. It allows you to easily remove and replace the module from the island
for maintenance. It also enables the PDM to distribute sensor bus power to input modules and
actuator power to output modules in the voltage group of I/O modules supported by that NIM.
A plastic block at the bottom of the base houses a PE captive screw (see page 383), which should
be used to make protective earth connections for the island. This captive screw block gives the
PDM an added height dimension of 138 mm (5.44 in). As a result, the PDMs are always the tallest
Advantys modules in an island segment.
NOTE: The STB XBA 2200 is designed only for PDMs. Do not attempt to use this base for other
size 2 Advantys modules such as STB I/O modules or island bus extension modules.

Physical Overview
The following illustration shows an STB XBA 2200 PDM base and highlights some of its key
physical components.

1 user-customizable label
2 six island bus contacts
3 DIN rail lock/release latch
4 DIN rail contact
5 PE contact
6 PE captive screw

31007720 08/2016 379

Bases

The Label Tab

A label can be positioned on the tab shown above in item 1 to help identify the module that will
reside at this base unit’s island bus location. A similar label can be placed on the PDM itself so that
they can be matched up properly during the island installation.
Labels are provided on an STB XMP 6700 marking label sheet, which can be ordered at no charge
from your Scneider Electric service provider.

The Island Bus Contacts

The six contacts located in a column at the top of the I/O base allow island bus logic power and
communication signals flow through the PDM downstream to the I/O modules:

1 not used
2 common ground contact
3 5 VDC logic power contact
4 island bus communications + contact
5 island bus communications - contact
6 address line contact

The STB PDT 3100 and STB PDT 2100 PDMs are non-addressable modules, and they do not use
the island’s logic power or communication buses. The six island bus contacts at the top of the base
are used for 5 V ground and for LED power.

380 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

The Lock/Release Latch

The latch in the center front of the STB XBA 2200 base has two positions, as shown below:
Release position

Lock position

The latch needs to be in release position while the base is being inserted on the DIN rail and when
it is being removed from the DIN rail. It needs to be in lock position when the base has been pushed
and snapped into place on the rail before the module is inserted into the base.

The DIN Rail Contacts

One of the roles of the DIN rail is to provide the island with functional earth. Functional earth
provides the island with noise immunity control and RFI/EMI protection.
When a PDM base is snapped onto the DIN rail, two contacts on the back of the rail provide the
functional ground connection between the rail and the PDM that will be seated on the base.

31007720 08/2016 381

Bases

Protective Earth
One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of protective earth to the island. PE is essentially a return line across the
bus for detected fault currents generated at a sensor or actuator device in the control system.
A captive screw at the bottom of the STB XBA 2200 base secures a PE wire to the island:

1 The PE contact
2 The PE captive screw

PE is brought to the island by an insulated ground conductor, usually a copper wire that is tied to
a single grounding point on the cabinet. The ground conductor is secured by the PE captive screw.
The STB XBA 2200 base distributes PE to the island via a single contact located at the bottom left
side of the base (item 2 above). The PDM base distributes PE to its right and left along the island
bus.
The single contact on the bottom left of the base is one of the ways to discriminate the
STB XBA 2200 from other size 2 bases. The PDM base does not need the four field power
contacts on its bottom left side—the PDM takes field power from an external power supply via two
power connectors on the front of the module and distributes that power downstream to the I/O
modules it supports.

382 31007720 08/2016

 Bases

The Protective Earth Connection

PE Contact for the Island

One of the key functions of a PDM, in addition to distributing sensor and actuator power to the I/O
modules, is the provision of protective earth (PE) to the island. On the bottom of each
STB XBA 2200 PDM base is a captive screw in a plastic block. By tightening this captive screw,
you can make a PE contact with the island bus. Every PDM base on the island bus should make
PE contact.

How PE Contact Is Made

PE is brought to the island by a heavy-duty cross-sectional wire, usually a copper braided cable,
6 mm2 or larger. The wire needs to be tied to a single grounding point. The ground conductor
connects to the bottom of the each PDM base and is secured by the PE captive screw.
Local electrical codes take precedence over our PE wiring recommendations.

Handling Multiple PE Connections

It is possible that more than one PDM will be used on an island. Each PDM base on the island will
receive a ground conductor and distribute PE as described above.
NOTE: Tie the PE lines from more than one PDM to a single PE ground point in a star
configuration. This will minimize ground loops and excessive current from being created in PE
lines.
This illustration shows separate PE connections tied to a single PE ground:

1 the NIM
2 a PDM
3 another PDM

31007720 08/2016 383

Bases

4 captive screws for the PE connections

5 FE connection on the DIN rail
6 PE ground point

384 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB

31007720 08/2016

Appendices

IEC Symbols
This appendix illustrates the IEC symbols used in the field wiring examples in this book and some
of the installation examples in the Advantys STB Planning and Installation Guide (890 USE 171).

What Is in This Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
A IEC Symbols 387
B STB HIgh Density I/O Telefast Connector Interfaces 389

31007720 08/2016 385

386 31007720 08/2016
 Advantys STB
IEC Symbols
31007720 08/2016

Appendix A
IEC Symbols

IEC Symbols

IEC Symbols

Introduction
The following table contains illustrations and definitions of the common IEC symbols used in
describing the Advantys STB modules and system.

List of Symbols
Here are some common IEC symbols used in the field wiring examples throughout this book:

Symbol Definition
two-wire actuator/output

three-wire actuator/output

two-wire digital sensor/input

three-wire digital sensor/input

four-wire digital sensor/input

31007720 08/2016 387

IEC Symbols

Symbol Definition
analog voltage sensor

analog current sensor

thermocouple element

fuse

VAC power

VDC power

earth ground

388 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Telefast Interfaces
31007720 08/2016

Appendix B
STB HIgh Density I/O Telefast Connector Interfaces

STB HIgh Density I/O Telefast Connector Interfaces

High-density Telefast I/O Connector Interfaces

Interface Models
Four connector interfaces are available to connect an Advantys STB high-density digital input
module or output module to an ABE7 Telefast wiring block:

Advantys STB Module Type Interface Connector Type Interface Model

digital input Telefast Twido sub-base HE10 STB XTS 5510
Telefast2 HE10 STB XTS 6510
digital output Telefast Twido sub-base HE10 STB XTS 5610
Telefast2 HE10 STB XTS 6610

Physical Characteristics
The interface fits in the I/O module’s field wiring connector headers. It is compatible with existing
wire plug headers on the I/O modules. The mating plugs on the interface are similar to those on
the 18-terminal STB XTS 1180 screw type connectors and STB XTS 2180 spring clamp
connectors.
The interface mates with a Telefast interconnect cable assembly that has 20-position HE10 style
sockets.

31007720 08/2016 389

Telefast Interfaces

The following illustration shows side and front isometric views of the connector interface on a high
density STB I/O module.

1 Make sure that this hole is positioned at the bottom of the module.

The interface is made up of a 20-position HE10 style header with locking latches and a label where
the commercial reference is marked

Interconnect Assemblies
The connector interfaces work with existing Telefast interconnect cable assemblies that have 20-
position HE10 connector sockets. No new or specially designed Telefast interconnect assemblies
are required. The following table lists the interface cable assemblies and the Telefast wiring blocks
that are approved for use with Advantys STB high density modules:

Interface Telefast Wiring Block) Telefast Cable)

STB XTS 5510 Telefast ABE 7E16EPN20 TSXCDP102
Twido HE10 input sub-
TSXCDP202
base
TSXCDP302
ABFT20E050
ABTF20E200
ABTF20E300

390 31007720 08/2016

 Telefast Interfaces

STB XTS 5610 Telefast ABE 7E16SRM20 ABFT20E050

Twido HE10 output
ABFT20E100
sub-base
ABFT20E200
TSXCDP102
TSXCDP202
TSXCDP302
STB XTS 6510 ABE 7S16E2B1 ABFH20H100
Telefast2 input HE10 ABE 7S16E2E0 ABFH20H200
ABE 7S16E2E1 ABFH20H300
ABE 7S16E2F0 TSXCDP053
ABE 7S16E2M0 TSXCDP103
TSXCDP203
TSXCDP301
TSXCDP303
TSXCDP503
TSXCDP501
STB XTS 6610 ABE 7R16S210 ABFH20H100
Telefast2 output HE10
ABE 7R16S212 ABFH20H200
ABE 7R16T210 ABFH20H300
ABE 7R16T212 TSXCDP053
ABE 7R16T230 TSXCDP103
ABE 7R16T231 TSXCDP203
ABE 7R16T330 TSXCDP301
ABE 7R16T332 TSXCDP303
ABE 7R16T370 TSXCDP501
ABE 7R16S2B0 TSXCDP503
ABE 7R16S2B2
ABE 7R16S111

Use only the Telefast blocks listed above with the Advantys STB high density interfaces.

31007720 08/2016 391

Telefast Interfaces

DANGER
RISK OF FIRE OR LOSS OF CONTROL
Do not use unfused Telefast passive output wiring blocks with the Advantys STB high density
connectors. These blocks have current limitations that are not compatible with Advantys STB
operations.
Always respect the current limitations of the Telefast wiring blocks that you choose. Do not place
loads on the high density I/O modules that can produce currents in excess of the specified current
rating of the wiring block in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Installing a Connector Interface

To install a Telefast I/O connector interface:

Step Action
1 Remove the interface from its packaging.
2 Attach the interface to the field I/O headers on the front of the Advantys STB
high-density digital I/O module. Make sure that you use an input connector for
an input module or an output connector for an output module.
3 Insert one of the interconnect cable assembly’s 20-position HE10 sockets into
the HE10 style header on the interface and secure locking latches.
4 Insert the other 20-position HE10 socket of the interconnect cable assembly
into the HE10 style header on the Telefast wiring block and secure locking
latches.

392 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Glossary
31007720 08/2016

Glossary

!
100Base-T
An adaptation of the IEEE 802.3u (Ethernet) standard, the 100Base-T standard uses twisted-pair
wiring with a maximum segment length of 100 m (328 ft) and terminates with an RJ-45 connector.
A 100Base-T network is a baseband network capable of transmitting data at a maximum speed of
100 Mbit/s. "Fast Ethernet" is another name for 100Base-T, because it is ten times faster than
10Base-T.
10Base-T
An adaptation of the IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) standard, the 10Base-T standard uses twisted-pair
wiring with a maximum segment length of 100 m (328 ft) and terminates with an RJ-45 connector.
A 10Base-T network is a baseband network capable of transmitting data at a maximum speed of
10 Mbit/s.
802.3 frame
A frame format, specified in the IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) standard, in which the header specifies the
data packet length.

A
agent
1. SNMP – the SNMP application that runs on a network device.
2. Fipio – a slave device on a network.
analog input
A module that contains circuits that convert analog DC input signals to digital values that can be
manipulated by the processor. By implication, these analog inputs are direct. That means a data
table value directly reflects the analog signal value.
analog output
A module that contains circuits that transmit an analog DC signal proportional to a digital value
input to the module from the processor. By implication, these analog outputs are direct. That
means a data table value directly controls the analog signal value.
application object
In CAN-based networks, application objects represent device-specific functionality, such as the
state of input or output data.
ARP
The ARP (address resolution protocol) is the IP network layer protocol, which uses ARP to map an
IP address to a MAC (hardware) address.

31007720 08/2016 393

Glossary

auto baud
The automatic assignment and detection of a common baud rate as well as the ability of a device
on a network to adapt to that rate.
auto-addressing
The assignment of an address to each Island bus I/O module and preferred device.
auto-configuration
The ability of Island modules to operate with predefined default parameters. A configuration of the
Island bus based completely on the actual assembly of I/O modules.

B
basic I/O
Low-cost Advantys STB input/output modules that use a fixed set of operating parameters. A basic
I/O module cannot be reconfigured with the Advantys Configuration Software and cannot be used
in reflex actions.
basic network interface
A low-cost Advantys STB network interface module that supports up to 12 Advantys STB I/O
modules. A basic NIM does not support the Advantys Configuration Software, reflex actions, nor
the use of an HMI panel.
basic power distribution module
A low-cost Advantys STB PDM that distributes sensor power and actuator power over a single field
power bus on the Island. The bus provides a maximum of 4 A total power. A basic PDM includes
a 5 A fuse.
BootP
BootP (bootstrap protocol) is an UDP/IP protocol that allows an internet node to obtain its IP
parameters based on its MAC address.
BOS
BOS stands for beginning of segment. When more than 1 segment of I/O modules is used in an
Island, an STB XBE 1200 or an STB XBE 1300 BOS module is installed in the first position in each
extension segment. Its job is to carry Island bus communications to and generate logic power for
the modules in the extension segment. Which BOS module has to be selected depends on the
module types that shall follow.
bus arbitrator
A master on a Fipio network.

394 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

C
CAN
The CAN (controller area network) protocol (ISO 11898) for serial bus networks is designed for the
interconnection of smart devices (from multiple manufacturers) in smart systems for real-time
industrial applications. CAN multi-master systems provide high data integrity through the
implementation of broadcast messaging and advanced diagnostic mechanisms. Originally
developed for use in automobiles, CAN is now used in a variety of industrial automation control
environments.
CANopen protocol
An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus. The protocol allows
the connection of any enhanced CANopen device to the Island bus.
CI
This abbreviation stands for command interface.
CiA
CiA (CAN in Automation) is a non-profit group of manufacturers and users dedicated to developing
and supporting CAN-based higher layer protocols.
CIP
Common Industrial Protocol. Networks that include CIP in the application layer can communicate
seamlessly with other CIP-based networks. For example, the implementation of CIP in the
application layer of an Ethernet TCP/IP network creates an EtherNet/IP environment. Similarly,
CIP in the application layer of a CAN network creates a DeviceNet environment. Devices on an
EtherNet/IP network can therefore communicate with devices on a DeviceNet network via CIP
bridges or routers.
COB
A COB (communication object) is a unit of transportation (a message) in a CAN-based network.
Communication objects indicate a particular functionality in a device. They are specified in the
CANopen communication profile.
configuration
The arrangement and interconnection of hardware components within a system and the hardware
and software selections that determine the operating characteristics of the system.
CRC
cyclic redundancy check. Messages that implement this detected error mechanism have a CRC
field that is calculated by the transmitter according to the message’s content. Receiving nodes
recalculate the field. Disagreement in the two codes indicates a difference between the transmitted
message and the one received.

31007720 08/2016 395

Glossary

CSMA/CS
carrier sense multiple access/collision detection. CSMA/CS is a MAC protocol that networks use
to manage transmissions. The absence of a carrier (transmission signal) indicates that a network
channel is idle. Multiple nodes may try to simultaneously transmit on the channel, which creates a
collision of signals. Each node detects the collision and immediately terminates transmission.
Messages from each node are retransmitted at random intervals until the frames are successfully
transmitted.

D
DDXML
Device Description eXtensible Markup Language
device name
A customer-driven, unique logical personal identifier for an Ethernet NIM. A device name (or role
name) is created when you combine the numeric rotary switch setting with the NIM (for example,
STBNIP2212_010).
After the NIM is configured with a valid device name, the DHCP server uses it to identify the island
at power up.
DeviceNet protocol
DeviceNet is a low-level, connection-based network that is based on CAN, a serial bus system
without a defined application layer. DeviceNet, therefore, defines a layer for the industrial
application of CAN.
DHCP
dynamic host configuration protocol. A TCP/IP protocol that allows a server to assign an
IP address based on a device name (host name) to a network node.
differential input
A type of input design where two wires (+ and -) are run from each signal source to the data
acquisition interface. The voltage between the input and the interface ground are measured by two
high-impedance amplifiers, and the outputs from the two amplifiers are subtracted by a third
amplifier to yield the difference between the + and - inputs. Voltage common to both wires is
thereby removed. When ground differences exist, use differential signalling instead of single ended
signalling to help reduce cross channel noise.
digital I/O
An input or output that has an individual circuit connection at the module corresponding directly to
a data table bit or word that stores the value of the signal at that I/O circuit. It allows the control
logic to have discrete access to the I/O values.
DIN
Deutsche industrial norms. A German agency that sets engineering and dimensional standards
and now has worldwide recognition.

396 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

Drivecom Profile
The Drivecom profile is part of CiA DSP 402 (profile), which defines the behavior of drives and
motion control devices on CANopen networks.

E
economy segment
A special type of STB I/O segment created when an STB NCO 1113 economy CANopen NIM is
used in the first location. In this implementation, the NIM acts as a simple gateway between the I/O
modules in the segment and a CANopen master. Each I/O module in an economy segment acts
as a independent node on the CANopen network. An economy segment cannot be extended to
other STB I/O segments, preferred modules or enhanced CANopen devices.
EDS
electronic data sheet. The EDS is a standardized ASCII file that contains information about a
network device’s communications functionality and the contents of its object dictionary. The EDS
also defines device-specific and manufacturer-specific objects.
EIA
Electronic Industries Association. An organization that establishes electrical/electronic and data
communication standards.
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility. Devices that meet EMC requirements can operate within a system’s
expected electromagnetic limits without interruption.
EMI
electromagnetic interference. EMI can cause an interruption or disturbance in the performance of
electronic equipment. It occurs when a source electronically transmits a signal that interferes with
other equipment.
EOS
This abbreviation stands for end of segment. When more than 1 segment of I/O modules is used
in an Island, an STB XBE 1000 or an STB XBE 1100 EOS module is installed in the last position
in every segment that has an extension following it. The EOS module extends Island bus
communications to the next segment. Which EOS module has to be selected depends on the
module types that shall follow.
Ethernet
A LAN cabling and signaling specification used to connect devices within a defined area, e.g., a
building. Ethernet uses a bus or a star topology to connect different nodes on a network.
Ethernet II
A frame format in which the header specifies the packet type, Ethernet II is the default frame format
for NIM communications.

31007720 08/2016 397

Glossary

EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP (the Ethernet Industrial Protocol) is especially suited to factory applications in which
there is a need to control, configure, and monitor events within an industrial system. The ODVA-
specified protocol runs CIP (the Common Industrial Protocol) on top of standard Internet protocols,
like TCP/IP and UDP. It is an open local (communications) network that enables the interconnec-
tivity of all levels of manufacturing operations from the plant’s office to the sensors and actuators
on its floor.

F
fallback state
A known state to which an Advantys STB I/O module can return in the event that its communication
connection is not open.
fallback value
The value that a device assumes during fallback. Typically, the fallback value is either configurable
or the last stored value for the device.
FED_P
Fipio extended device profile. On a Fipio network, the standard device profile type for agents
whose data length is more than 8 words and equal to or less than 32 words.
Fipio
Fieldbus Interface Protocol (FIP). An open fieldbus standard and protocol that conforms to the
FIP/World FIP standard. Fipio is designed to provide low-level configuration, parameterization,
data exchange, and diagnostic services.
Flash memory
Flash memory is nonvolatile memory that can be overwritten. It is stored on a special EEPROM
that can be erased and reprogrammed.
FRD_P
Fipio reduced device profile. On a Fipio network, the standard device profile type for agents whose
data length is two words or less.
FSD_P
Fipio standard device profile. On a Fipio network, the standard device profile type for agents whose
data length is more than two words and equal to or less than 8 words.
full scale
The maximum level in a specific range—e.g., in an analog input circuit the maximum allowable
voltage or current level is at full scale when any increase beyond that level is over-range.
function block
A function block performs a specific automation function, such as speed control. A function block
comprises configuration data and a set of operating parameters.

398 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

function code
A function code is an instruction set commanding 1 or more slave devices at a specified
address(es) to perform a type of action, e.g., read a set of data registers and respond with the
content.

G
gateway
A program or hardware that passes data between networks.
global_ID
global_identifier. A 16-bit integer that uniquely identifies a device’s location on a network. A
global_ID is a symbolic address that is universally recognized by all other devices on the network.
GSD
generic slave data (file). A device description file, supplied by the device’s manufacturer, that
defines a device’s functionality on a Profibus DP network.

H
HMI
human-machine interface. An operator interface, graphical, for industrial equipment.
hot swapping
Replacing a component with a like component while the system remains operational. When the
replacement component is installed, it begins to function automatically.
HTTP
hypertext transfer protocol. The protocol that a web server and a client browser use to
communicate with one another.

I
I/O base
A mounting device, designed to seat an Advantys STB I/O module, connect it on a DIN rail, and
connect it to the Island bus. It provides the connection point where the module can receive either
24 VDC or 115/230 VAC from the input or output power bus distributed by a PDM.
I/O module
In a programmable controller system, an I/O module interfaces directly to the sensors and
actuators of the machine/process. This module is the component that mounts in an I/O base and
provides electrical connections between the controller and the field devices. Normal I/O module
capacities are offered in a variety of signal levels and capacities.

31007720 08/2016 399

Glossary

I/O scanning
The continuous polling of the Advantys STB I/O modules performed by the COMS to collect data
bits, status, nd diagnostics information.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission Carrier. Founded in 1884 to focus on advancing the
theory and practice of electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and computer science.
EN 61131-2 is the specification that deals with industrial automation equipment.
IEC type 1 input
Type 1 digital inputs support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices such as relay
contacts and push buttons operating in normal environmental conditions.
IEC type 2 input
Type 2 digital inputs support sensor signals from solid state devices or mechanical contact
switching devices such as relay contacts, push buttons (in normal or harsh environmental
conditions), and 2- or 3-wire proximity switches.
IEC type 3 input
Type 3 digital inputs support sensor signals from mechanical switching devices such as relay
contacts, push buttons (in normal-to-moderate environmental conditions), 3-wire proximity
switches and 2-wire proximity switches that have:
 a voltage drop of no more than 8 V
 a minimum operating current capability less than or equal to 2.5 mA
 a maximum off-state current less than or equal to 1.5 mA

IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. The international standards and conformity
assessment body for all fields of electrotechnology, including electricity and electronics.
IGMP
(Internet group management protocol). This Internet standard for multicasting allows a host to
subscribe to a particular multicast group.
industrial I/O
An Advantys STB I/O module designed at a moderate cost for typical continuous, high-duty-cycle
applications. Modules of this type often feature standard IEC threshold ratings, providing user-
configurable parameter options, on-board protection, good resolution, and field wiring options.
They are designed to operate in moderate-to-high temperature ranges.
input filtering
The amount of time that a sensor has to hold its signal on or off before the input module detects
the change of state.
input polarity
An input channel’s polarity determines when the input module sends a 1 and when it sends a 0 to
the master controller. If the polarity is normal, an input channel sends a 1 to the controller when its
field sensor turns on. If the polarity is reverse, an input channel sends a 0 to the controller when its
field sensor turns on.

400 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

input response time

The time it takes for an input channel to receive a signal from the field sensor and put it on the
Island bus.
INTERBUS protocol
The INTERBUS fieldbus protocol observes a master/slave network model with an active ring
topology, having all devices integrated in a closed transmission path.
IOC object
Island operation control object. A special object that appears in the CANopen object dictionary
when the remote virtual placeholder option is enabled in a CANopen NIM. It is a 16-bit word that
provides the fieldbus master with a mechanism for issuing reconfiguration and start requests.
IOS object
Island operation status object. A special object that appears in the CANopen object dictionary
when the remote virtual placeholder option is enabled in a CANopen NIM. It is a 16-bit word that
reports the success of reconfiguration and start requests or records diagnostic information in the
event that a request is not completed.
IP
internet protocol. That part of the TCP/IP protocol family that tracks the internet addresses of
nodes, routes outgoing messages, and recognizes incoming messages.
IP Rating
Ingress Protection rating according to IEC 60529. Each IP rating requires the following standards
to be met with respect to a rated device:
 IP20 modules are protected against ingress and contact of objects larger than 12.5 mm. The
module is not protected against harmful ingress of water.
 IP67 modules are completely protected against ingress of dust and contact. Ingress of water in
harmful quantity is not possible when the enclosure is immersed in water up to 1 m.

L
LAN
local area network. A short-distance data communications network.
light industrial I/O
An Advantys STB I/O module designed at a low cost for less rigorous (e.g., intermittent, low-duty-
cycle) operating environments. Modules of this type operate in lower temperature ranges with
lower qualification and agency requirements and limited on-board protection; they have limited or
no user-configuration options.
linearity
A measure of how closely a characteristic follows a straight-line function.
LSB
least significant bit, least significant byte. The part of a number, address, or field that is written as
the rightmost single value in conventional hexadecimal or binary notation.

31007720 08/2016 401

Glossary

M
MAC address
media access control address. A 48-bit number, unique on a network, that is programmed into
each network card or device when it is manufactured.
mandatory module
When an Advantys STB I/O module is configured to be mandatory, it should be present and
healthy in the Island configuration for the Island to be operational. If a mandatory module is
inoperable or is removed from its location on the Island bus, the Island goes to a pre-operational
state. By default, all I/O modules are not mandatory. You should use the Advantys Configuration
Software to set this parameter.
master/slave model
The direction of control in a network that implements the master/slave model is from the master to
the slave devices.
Modbus
Modbus is an application layer messaging protocol. Modbus provides client and server
communications between devices connected on different types of buses or networks. Modbus
offers many services specified by function codes.
MOV
metal oxide varistor. A 2-electrode semiconductor device with a voltage-dependant nonlinear
resistance that drops markedly as the applied voltage is increased. It is used to suppress transient
voltage surges.
MSB
most significant bit, most significant byte. The part of a number, address, or field that is written as
the leftmost single value in conventional hexadecimal or binary notation.

N
N.C. contact
normally closed contact. A relay contact pair that is closed when the relay coil is de-energized and
open when the coil is energized.
N.O. contact
normally open contact. A relay contact pair that is open when the relay coil is de-energized and
closed when the coil is energized.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
network cycle time
The time that a master requires to complete a single scan of the configured I/O modules on a
network device; typically expressed in microseconds.

402 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

NIM
network interface module. This module is the interface between an Island bus and the fieldbus
network of which the Island is a part. A NIM enables all the I/O on the Island to be treated as a
single node on the fieldbus. The NIM also provides 5 V of logic power to the Advantys STB I/O
modules in the same segment as the NIM.
NMT
network management. NMT protocols provide services for network initialization, diagnostic control,
and device status control.

O
object dictionary
Part of the CANopen device model that provides a map to the internal structure of CANopen
devices (according to CANopen profile DS-401). A device’s object dictionary (also called the object
directory) is a lookup table that describes the data types, communications objects, and application
objects the device uses. By accessing a particular device’s object dictionary through the CANopen
fieldbus, you can predict its network behavior and build a distributed application.
ODVA
Open Devicenet Vendors Association. The ODVA supports the family of network technologies that
are built on the Common Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, and CompoNet).
open industrial communication network
A distributed communication network for industrial environments based on open standards (EN
50235, EN50254, and EN50170, and others) that allows the exchange of data between devices
from different manufacturers.
output filtering
The amount that it takes an output channel to send change-of-state information to an actuator after
the output module has received updated data from the NIM.
output polarity
An output channel’s polarity determines when the output module turns its field actuator on and
when it turns the actuator off. If the polarity is normal, an output channel turns its actuator on when
the master controller sends it a 1. If the polarity is reverse, an output channel turns its actuator on
when the master controller sends it a 0.
output response time
The time it takes for an output module to take an output signal from the Island bus and send it to
its field actuator.

P
parameterize
To supply the required value for an attribute of a device at run-time.

31007720 08/2016 403

Glossary

PDM
power distribution module. A module that distributes either AC or DC field power to a cluster of I/O
modules directly to its right on the Island bus. A PDM delivers field power to the input modules and
the output modules. It is important that all the I/O installed directly to the right of a PDM be in the
same voltage group—either 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC.
PDO
process data object. In CAN-based networks, PDOs are transmitted as unconfirmed broadcast
messages or sent from a producer device to a consumer device. The transmit PDO from the
producer device has a specific identifier that corresponds to the receive PDO of the consumer
devices.
PE
protective ground. A return line across the bus to keep improper currents generated at a sensor or
actuator device out of the control system.
peer-to-peer communications
In peer-to-peer communications, there is no master/slave or client/server relationship. Messages
are exchanged between entities of comparable or equivalent levels of functionality, without having
to go through a third party (like a master device).
PLC
programmable logic controller. The PLC is the brain of an industrial manufacturing process. It
automates a process as opposed to relay control systems. PLCs are computers suited to survive
the harsh conditions of the industrial environment.
PowerSuite Software
PowerSuite Software is a tool for configuring and monitoring control devices for electric motors,
including ATV31x, ATV71, and TeSys U.
preferred module
An I/O module that functions as an auto-addressable device on an Advantys STB Island but is not
in the same form factor as a standard Advantys STB I/O module and therefore does not fit in an
I/O base. A preferred device connects to the Island bus via an EOS module and a length of a
preferred module extension cable. It can be extended to another preferred module or back into a
BOS module. If it is the last device on the Island, it should be terminated with a 120 Ω terminator.
premium network interface
A premium NIM has advanced features over a standard or basic NIM.
prioritization
An optional feature on a standard NIM that allows you to selectively identify digital input modules
to be scanned more frequently during a the NIM’s logic scan.
process I/O
An Advantys STB I/O module designed for operation at extended temperature ranges in
conformance with IEC type 2 thresholds. Modules of this type often feature high levels of on-board
diagnostics, high resolution, user-configurable parameter options, and higher levels of agency
approval.

404 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

process image
A part of the NIM firmware that serves as a real-time data area for the data exchange process. The
process image includes an input buffer that contains current data and status information from the
Island bus and an output buffer that contains the current outputs for the Island bus, from the
fieldbus master.
producer/consumer model
In networks that observe the producer/consumer model, data packets are identified according to
their data content rather than by their node address. All nodes listen on the network and consume
those data packets that have appropriate identifiers.
Profibus DP
Profibus Decentralized Peripheral. An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on
a shielded 2-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable. DP transmission allows
for high-speed, cyclic exchange of data between the controller CPU and the distributed I/O
devices.

Q
QoS
(quality of service). The practice of assigning different priorities to traffic types for the purpose of
regulating data flow on the network. In an Industrial network, QoS can help provide a predictable
level of network performance.

R
reflex action
A simple, logical command function configured locally on an Island bus I/O module. Reflex actions
are executed by Island bus modules on data from various Island locations, like input and output
modules or the NIM. Examples of reflex actions include compare and copy operations.
repeater
An interconnection device that extends the permissible length of a bus.
reverse polarity protection
Use of a diode in a circuit to help protect against damage and unintended operation in the event
that the polarity of the applied power is accidentally reversed.
rms
root mean square. The effective value of an alternating current, corresponding to the DC value that
produces the same heating effect. The rms value is computed as the square root of the average
of the squares of the instantaneous amplitude for 1 complete cycle. For a sine wave, the rms value
is 0.707 times the peak value.

31007720 08/2016 405

Glossary

role name
A customer-driven, unique logical personal identifier for an Ethernet NIM. A role name (or device
name) is created when you:
 combine the numeric rotary switch setting with the NIM (for example, STBNIP2212_010), or . . .
 edit the Device Name setting in the NIM's embedded web server pages
After the NIM is configured with a valid role name, the DHCP server uses it to identify the island at
power up.
RSTP
(rapid spanning tree protocol). Allows a network design to include spare (redundant) links that
provide automatic backup paths when an active link becomes inoperable, without loops or manual
enabling/disabling of backup links. Loops should be avoided because they result in flooding the
network.
RTD
resistive temperature detect. An RTD device is a temperature transducer composed of conductive
wire elements typically made of platinum, nickel, copper, or nickel-iron. An RTD device provides a
variable resistance across a specified temperature range.
RTP
run-time parameters. RTP lets you monitor and modify selected I/O parameters and Island bus
status registers of the NIM while the Advantys STB Island is running. The RTP feature uses 5
reserved output words in the NIM’s process image (the RTP request block) to send requests, and
4 reserved input words in the NIM’s process image (the RTP response block) to receive responses.
Available only in standard NIMs running firmware version 2.0 or higher.
Rx
reception. For example, in a CAN-based network, a PDO is described as an RxPDO of the device
that receives it.

S
SAP
service access point. The point at which the services of 1 communications layer, as defined by the
ISO OSI reference model, is made available to the next layer.
SCADA
supervisory control and data acquisition. Typically accomplished in industrial settings by means of
microcomputers.
SDO
service data object. In CAN-based networks, SDO messages are used by the fieldbus master to
access (read/write) the object directories of network nodes.

406 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

segment
A group of interconnected I/O and power modules on an Island bus. An Island should have at least
1 segment and, depending on the type of NIM used, may have as many as 7 segments. The first
(leftmost) module in a segment needs to provide logic power and Island bus communications to
the I/O modules on its right. In the primary or basic segment, that function is filled by a NIM. In an
extension segment, that function is filled by an STB XBE 1200 or an STB XBE 1300 BOS module.
SELV
safety extra low voltage. A secondary circuit designed so that the voltage between any 2
accessible parts (or between 1 accessible part and the PE terminal for Class 1 equipment) does
not exceed a specified value under normal conditions or under single-fault conditions.
SIM
subscriber identification module. Originally intended for authenticating users of mobile
communications, SIMs now have multiple applications. In Advantys STB, configuration data
created or modified with the Advantys Configuration Software can be stored on a SIM (referred to
as the “removable memory card”) and then written to the NIM’s Flash memory.
single-ended inputs
An analog input design technique whereby a wire from each signal source is connected to the data
acquisition interface, and the difference between the signal and ground is measured. For the
success of this design technique, 2 conditions are imperative: the signal source should be
grounded, and the signal ground and data acquisition interface ground (the PDM lead) should have
the same potential.
sink load
An output that, when turned on, receives DC current from its load.
size 1 base
A mounting device, designed to seat an STB module, install it on a DIN rail, and connect it to the
Island bus. It is 13.9 mm (0.55 in.) wide and 128.25 mm (5.05 in.) high.
size 2 base
A mounting device, designed to seat an STB module, install it on a DIN rail, and connect it to the
Island bus. It is 18.4 mm (0.73 in.) wide and 128.25 mm (5.05 in.) high.
size 3 base
A mounting device, designed to seat an STB module, install it on a DIN rail, and connect it to the
Island bus. It is 28.1 mm (1.11 in.) wide and 128.25 mm (5.05 in.) high.
slice I/O
An I/O module design that combines a small number of channels (between 2 and 6) in a small
package. The idea is to allow a system developer to purchase just the right amount of I/O and to
be able to distribute it around the machine in an efficient, mechatronics way.
SM_MPS
state management_message periodic services. The applications and network management
services used for process control, data exchange, diagnostic message reporting, and device status
notification on a Fipio network.

31007720 08/2016 407

Glossary

SNMP
simple network management protocol. The UDP/IP standard protocol used to manage nodes on
an IP network.
snubber
A circuit generally used to suppress inductive loads—it consists of a resistor in series with a
capacitor (in the case of an RC snubber) and/or a metal-oxide varistor placed across the AC load.
source load
A load with a current directed into its input; has to be driven by a current source.
standard I/O
Any of a subset of Advantys STB input/output modules designed at a moderate cost to operate with
user-configurable parameters. A standard I/O module may be reconfigured with the Advantys
Configuration Software and, in most cases, may be used in reflex actions.
standard network interface
An Advantys STB network interface module designed at moderate cost to support the
configuration capabilities, multi-segment design and throughput capacity suitable for most
standard applications on the Island bus. An Island run by a standard NIM can support up to 32
addressable Advantys STB and/or preferred I/O modules, up to 12 of which may be standard
CANopen devices.
standard power distribution module
An Advantys STB module that distributes sensor power to the input modules and actuator power
to the output modules over two separate power buses on the Island. The bus provides a maximum
of 4 A to the input modules and 8 A to the output modules. A standard PDM requires a 5 A fuse for
the input modules and an 8 A fuse for the outputs.
STD_P
standard profile. On a Fipio network, a standard profile is a fixed set of configuration and operating
parameters for an agent device, based on the number of modules that the device contains and the
device’s total data length. There are 3 types of standard profiles: Fipio reduced device profile
(FRD_P), Fipio standard device profile (FSD_P), and the Fipio extended device profile (FED_P).
stepper motor
A specialized DC motor that allows discrete positioning without feedback.
subnet
A part of a network that shares a network address with the other parts of a network. A subnet may
be physically and/or logically independent of the rest of the network. A part of an internet address
called a subnet number, which is ignored in IP routing, distinguishes the subnet.
surge suppression
The process of absorbing and clipping voltage transients on an incoming AC line or control circuit.
Metal-oxide varistors and specially designed RC networks are frequently used as surge
suppression mechanisms.

408 31007720 08/2016

 Glossary

T
TC
thermocouple. A TC device is a bimetallic temperature transducer that provides a temperature
value by measuring the voltage differential caused by joining together two different metals at
different temperatures.
TCP
transmission control protocol. A connection-oriented transport layer protocol that provides full-
duplex data transmission. TCP is part of the TCP/IP suite of protocols.
telegram
A data packet used in serial communication.
TFE
transparent factory Ethernet. Schneider Electric’s open automation framework based on TCP/IP.
Tx
transmission. For example, in a CAN-based network, a PDO is described as a TxPDO of the device
that transmits it.

U
UDP
user datagram protocol. A connectionless mode protocol in which messages are delivered in a
datagram to a destination computer. The UDP protocol is typically bundled with the Internet
Protocol (UPD/IP).

V
varistor
A 2-electrode semiconductor device with a voltage-dependant nonlinear resistance that drops
markedly as the applied voltage is increased. It is used to suppress transient voltage surges.
voltage group
A grouping of Advantys STB I/O modules, all with the same voltage requirement, installed directly
to the right of the appropriate power distribution module (PDM) and separated from modules with
different voltage requirements. Install modules with different voltage requirements in different
voltage groups.
VPCR object
virtual placeholder configuration read object. A special object that appears in the CANopen object
dictionary when the remote virtual placeholder option is enabled in a CANopen NIM. It provides a
32-bit subindex that represents the actual module configuration used in a physical Island.

31007720 08/2016 409

Glossary

VPCW object
virtual placeholder configuration write object. A special object that appears in the CANopen object
dictionary when the remote virtual placeholder option is enabled in a CANopen NIM. It provides a
32-bit subindex where the fieldbus master can write a module reconfiguration. After the fieldbus
writes to the VPCW subindex, it can issue a reconfiguration request to the NIM that begins the
remote virtual placeholder operation.

W
watchdog timer
A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle. If the
watchdog runs past its programmed time period, it reports a time-out.

410 31007720 08/2016

 Advantys STB
Index
31007720 08/2016

Index

A digital input modules

STB DAI 5230, 116
actuator bus contacts
STB DAI 5260, 127
on an STB XBA 1000 I/O base, 370
STB DAI 7220, 138
on an STB XBA 2000 I/O base, 374
STB DDI 3230, 40
on an STB XBA 3000 I/O base, 378
STB DDI 3420, 53
Actuator bus contacts
STB DDI 3425, 67
on the I/O bases, 35
STB DDI 3610, 78
agency approvals, 37
STB DDI 3615, 92
AM1DP200 DIN rail, 21
digital output modules
auto-recovery
STB DAO 5260, 253
for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
STB DAO 8210, 268
ule, 158
STB DDO 3200, 150
for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod-
STB DDO 3230, 165
ule, 175
STB DDO 3410, 183
for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
STB DDO 3415, 200
ule, 192
STB DDO 3600, 211
for the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod-
STB DDO 3605, 228
ule, 207
DIN rail, 21
for the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod-
ule, 220
for the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod-
ule, 235
E
electromagnetic susceptibility specifications,
for the STB DDO 3705 digital output mod-
38
ule, 249
emission specifications, 38
environmental system specifications, 37
D
data register F
STB DAI 5230 digital input module, 124
fallback modes
STB DAI 5260 digital input module, 135
for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
STB DDI 3230 digital input module, 50
ule, 159
STB DDI 3420 digital input module, 63
for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod-
STB DDI 3425 digital input module, 75
ule, 176
STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 88
for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
STB DDI 3615 digital input module, 100
ule, 193
STB DDI 3725 digital input module, 113
for the STB DRA 3290 relay output mod-
ule, 311
for the STB DRC 3210 relay output mod-
ule, 295

31007720 08/2016 411

Index

fallback states 132

for the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod- on the STB DAI 7220 digital input module,
ule, 262 143
for the STB DAO 8210 digital output mod- on the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod-
ule, 278 ule, 258
for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod- on the STB DAO 8210 digital output mod-
ule, 160 ule, 273
for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 3230 digital input module,
ule, 177 45
for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 3420 digital input module,
ule, 194 58
for the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 3425 digital input module,
ule, 207 72
for the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 36100 digital input mod-
ule, 221, 222 ule, 84
for the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 36150 digital input mod-
ule, 235 ule, 97
for the STB DDO 3705 digital output mod- on the STB DDI 3725 digital input module,
ule, 249 108
for the STB DRA 3290 relay output mod- on the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
ule, 312 ule, 155
for the STB DRC 3210 relay output mod- on the STB DDO 3230 digital out put mod-
ule, 296 ule, 170
fault recovery on the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod- ule, 189
ule, 157 on the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod-
for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod- ule, 205
ule, 174 on the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod-
for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod- ule, 217
ule, 191 on the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod-
for the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod- ule, 233
ule, 207 on the STB DDO 3705 digital output mod-
for the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod- ule, 245
ule, 219 on the STB DRA 3290 relay module, 307
for the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod- on the STB DRC 3210 relay module, 291
ule, 235 Functional ground connection
for the STB DDO 3705 digital output mod- on the I/O bases, 35
ule, 249
Field power distribution contacts
on the I/O bases, 35 I
field wiring I/O base units
on the STB DAI 5230 digital input module, STB XBA 1000, 367
121 STB XBA 2000, 371
on the STB DAI 5260 digital input module, STB XBA 3000, 375

412 31007720 08/2016

 Index

IEC type 1 inputs 47

on the STB DAI 5230 digital input module, for the STB DDI 3420 digital input module,
121 60
on the STB DAI 5260 digital input module, for the STB DDI 3425 digital input module,
132 74
on the STB DAI 7220 digital input module, input polarity
143 for the STB DAI 5230 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 123
84 for the STB DAI 5260 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3615 digital input module, 134
97 for the STB DAI 7220 digital input module,
IEC type 2 inputs 145
on the STB DDI 3230 digital input module, for the STB DDI 3230 digital input module,
45 48
IEC type 3 inputs for the STB DDI 3420 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3425 digital input module, 61
72 for the STB DDI 3425 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3430 digital input module, 74
58 for the STB DDI 3610 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3725 digital input module, 86
108 for the STB DDI 3615 digital input module,
industrial class I/O modules 99
STB DAI 5230 digital input module, 121 for the STB DDI 3725 digital input module,
STB DAI 5260 digital input module, 132 112
STB DAI 7220 digital input module, 143
STB DAO 5260 digital output module, 258
STB DAO 8210 digital output module, 273 K
STB DDI 3230 digital input module, 45 keying pins
STB DDI 3420 digital input module, 58 STB XMP 7810 PDM kit, 326, 337, 347,
STB DDI 3425 digital input module, 72 359
STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 84
STB DDI 3615 digital input module, 97
STB DDI 3725 digital input module, 108 L
STB DDO 3200 digital output module, 155 labels
STB DDO 3230 digital output module, 170 for Advantys modules and bases, 368,
STB DDO 3410 digital output module, 189 372
STB DDO 3415 digital output module, 205 for STB modules and bases, 380
STB DDO 3600 digital output module, 217 latched off outputs
STB DDO 3605 digital output module, 233 for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
STB DDO 3705 digital output module, 245 ule, 158
STB DRA 3290 relay output module, 307 for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod-
STB DRC 3210 relay output module, 291 ule, 175
input filter time constant for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
for the STB DDI 3230 digital input module, ule, 192
for the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod-

31007720 08/2016 413

Index

ule, 220
LEDs
O
operating parameters
on the STB DAI 5230 digital input module,
STB DDI 3425 digital input module, 74
119
STB DDI 3615 digital input module, 99
on the STB DAI 5260 digital input module,
STB DDI 3725 digital input module, 112
130
STB DDO 3415 digital output module, 207
on the STB DAI 7220 digital input module,
output polarity
141
for the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod-
on the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod-
ule, 260
ule, 256
for the STB DAO 8210 digital output mod-
on the STB DAO digital output module,
ule, 276
271
for the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
on the STB DDI 3230 digital input module,
ule, 158
43
for the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod-
on the STB DDI 3420 digital input module,
ule, 175
56
for the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
on the STB DDI 3425 digital input module,
ule, 192
70
for the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod-
on the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod-
ule, 220
ule, 153
for the STB DRA 3290 relay output mod-
on the STB DDO 3230 digital output mod-
ule, 310
ule, 168
for the STB DRC 3210 relay output mod-
on the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
ule, 294
ule, 186
on the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod-
ule, 203
on the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod-
P
ule, 214 PDM base unit
on the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod- STB XBA 2200, 379
ule, 231 PE bus contact
on the STB DDO 3705 digital output mod- on the I/O bases, 35
ule, 242 power distribution modules
on the STB DRA 3290 relay module, 305 STB PDT 2100 standard 115/230 VAC,
on the STB DRC 3210 relay module, 289 320
on the STB PDT 2100 AC power distribu- STB PDT 2105 basic 115/230 VAC, 332
tion module, 325 STB PDT 3100 standard 24 VDC, 341
on the STB PDT 3100 DC power distribu- STB PDT 3105 basic 24 VDC, 354
tion module, 346 power wiring
STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 81 on the STB PDT 2100 power distribution
STB DDI 3615 digital input module, 95 module, 326
STB DDI 3725 digital input module, 105 on the STB PDT 2105 power distribution
Logic side contacts module, 337
on the I/O bases, 34 on the STB PDT 3100 power distribution
module, 347
on the STB PDT 3105 power distribution
module, 359

414 31007720 08/2016

 Index

STB DAI 7220 digital input module

R data register, 146
relay output modules field wiring, 143
STB DRA 3290, 302 IEC type 1 inputs, 143
STB DRC 3210, 286 input polarity, 145
LED indicators, 141
user-configurable parameters, 145
S wiring diagram, 144
sensor bus contacts STB DAO 5260 digital output module
on an STB XBA 1000 I/O base, 370 data register, 264
on an STB XBA 2000 I/O base, 374 echo output data register, 265
on an STB XBA 3000 I/O base, 378 echo register, 265
on the I/O bases, 35 fallback states, 262
specifications field wiring, 258
electromagnetic susceptibility, 38 LED indicators, 256
emission, 38 output polarity, 260
environmental, 37 user-configurable parameters, 260
environmental, system-wide, 37 wiring diagram, 259
STB DRC 3210 relay module, 300 STB DAO 8210 digital input module
ST XTS 1110 screw type field wiring connec- data register, 280
tor STB DAO 8210 digital output module
on the STB DRA 3290 relay module, 307 echo output data register, 281
status register fallback states, 278
STB DDI 3230 digital input module, 50 field wiring, 273
STB DDI 3420 digital input module, 64 output polarity, 276
STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 89 status register, 281
STB DAI 5230 digital input module user-configurable parameters, 276
data register, 124 wiring diagram, 275
field wiring, 121 STB DAO digital output module
IEC type 1 inputs, 121 LED indicators, 271
input polarity, 123 STB DDI 3230 digital input module
LED indicators, 119 data register, 50
user-configurable parameters, 123 field wiring, 45
wiring diagram, 122 IEC type 2 inputs, 45
STB DAI 5260 digital input module input filter time constant, 47
data register, 135 input polarity, 48
field wiring, 132 LED indicators, 43
IEC type 1 inputs, 132 status register, 50
input polarity, 134 user-configurable parameters, 47
LED indicators, 130 wiring diagram, 46
user-configurable parameters, 134
wiring diagram, 133

31007720 08/2016 415

Index

STB DDI 3420 digital input module STB DDI 3725 digital input module
data register, 63 data register, 113
field wiring, 58 field wiring, 108
input filter time constant, 60 IEC type 3 inputs, 108
input polarity, 61 input polarity, 112
LED indicators, 56 LED indicators, 105
status register, 64 operating parameters, 112
user-configurable parameters, 60 wiring diagram, 110, 111
wiring diagram, 59 STB DDO 3200 digital output module
STB DDI 3425 digital input module auto-recovery, 158
data register, 75 configurable fallback modes, 159
field wiring, 72 configurable fallback states, 160
IEC type 3 inputs, 72 echo output data register, 162
input filter time constant, 74 fault recovery, 157
input polarity, 74 field wiring, 155
LED indicators, 70 latched off, 158
operating parameters, 74 LED indicators, 153
wiring diagram, 73 output data register, 161
STB DDI 3430 digital input module output polarity, 158
IEC type 3 inputs, 58 output status register, 162
STB DDI 3610 digital input module user-configurable parameters, 157
data register, 88 wiring diagram, 156
field wiring, 84 STB DDO 3230 digital out put module
IEC type 1 inputs, 84 field wiring, 170
input polarity, 86 wiring diagram, 172
LED indicators, 81 STB DDO 3230 digital output module
status register, 89 auto-recovery, 175
user-configurable parameters, 86 configurable fallback modes, 176
STB DDI 36100 digital input module configurable fallback states, 177
wiring diagram, 85 data register, 179
STB DDI 3615 digital input module echo output data register, 180
data register, 100 fault recovery, 174
field wiring, 97 latched off, 175
IEC type 1 inputs, 97 LED indicators, 168
input polarity, 99 output polarity, 175
LED indicators, 95 status register, 180
operating parameters, 99 user-configurable parameters, 174
STB DDI 36150 digital input module
wiring diagram, 98

416 31007720 08/2016

 Index

STB DDO 3410 digital output module STB DDO 3705 digital output module
auto-recovery, 192 auto-recovery, 249
configurable fallback modes, 193 configurable fallback states, 249
configurable fallback states, 194 data register, 250
data register, 196 fault recovery, 249
echo output data register, 197 field wiring, 245
fault recovery, 191 LED indicators, 242
field wiring, 189 output polarity, 249
latched off, 192 user-configurable parameters, 249
LED indicators, 186 wiring diagram, 247
output polarity, 192 STB DRA 3290 relay module
status register, 196 data register, 314
user-configurable parameters, 191 echo output data register, 315
wiring diagram, 190 field wiring, 307
STB DDO 3415 digital output module LED indicators, 305
auto-recovery, 207 status register, 315
data register, 208 wiring diagram, 309
fallback states, 207 STB DRA 3290 relay output module
fault recovery, 207 configurable fallback modes, 311
field wiring, 205 configurable fallback states, 312
LED indicators, 203 STB DRA 3290 relay output module
operating parameters, 207 output polarity, 310
wiring diagram, 206 STB DRA 3290 relay output module
STB DDO 3600 digital output module user-configurable parameters, 310
auto-recovery, 220 STB DRC 3210 relay module
configurable fallback states, 221, 222 data register, 298
data register, 224 echo output data register, 299
echo output data register, 225 field wiring, 291
fault recovery, 219 LED indicators, 289
field wiring, 217 status registers, 299
latched off, 220 technical specifications, 300
LED indicators, 214 wiring diagram, 293
output polarity, 220 STB DRC 3210 relay output module
status registers, 225 configurable fallback modes, 295
user-configurable parameters, 219 configurable fallback states, 296
wiring diagram, 218 output polarity, 294
STB DDO 3605 digital output module user-configurable parameters, 294
auto-recovery, 235 STB PDT 2100 AC power distribution module
configurable fallback states, 235 LED indicators, 325
data register, 236 STB PDT 2100 power distribution module
fault recovery, 235 power wiring, 326
field wiring, 233 wiring diagram, 327
LED indicators, 231 STB PDT 2105 power distribution module
user-configurable parameters, 235 power wiring, 337
wiring diagram, 234 wiring diagram, 338

31007720 08/2016 417

Index

STB PDT 3100 DC power distribution module ule, 217

LED indicators, 346 on the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod-
STB PDT 3100 power distribution module ule, 233
power wiring, 347 STB XTS 1110 screw type field wiring con-
wiring diagram, 348 nector
STB PDT 3105 power distribution module on the STB DAI 5230 digital input module,
power wiring, 359 121
wiring diagram, 360 on the STB DAI 5260 digital input module,
STB XBA 1000 I/O base 132
for 13.9 mm Advantys STB I/O modules, on the STB DAI 7220 digital input module,
367 143
STB XBA 2000 I/O base on the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod-
for 18.4 mm Advantys STB I/O modules, ule, 258
371 on the STB DAO 8210 digital output mod-
STB XBA 2200 PDM base ule, 273
for AC and DC power distribution, 379 on the STB DRC 3210 relay module, 291
STB XBA 3000 I/O base STB XTS 1130 screw type power wiring con-
for 27.8 mm Advantys I/O modules, 375 nector
STB XMP 6700 label sheet, 368, 372 on the STB PDT 2100 power distribution
STB XMP 6700 marking label sheet, 380 module, 326
STB XMP 7810 safety keying pins on the STB PDT 2105 power distribution
for the PDM power connectors, 326, 337, module, 337
347, 359 on the STB PDT 3100 power distribution
STB XTS 1100 screw type field wiring con- module, 347
nector on the STB PDT 3105 power distribution
on the STB DDI 3230 digital input module, module, 359
45 STB XTS 1180 screw type field wiring con-
on the STB DDI 3420 digital input module, nector
58 on the STB DDI 3725 digital input module,
on the STB DDI 3425 digital input module, 108
72 STB XTS 1180 screw-type field wiring con-
on the STB DDI 36100 digital input mod- nector
ule, 84 on STB DDO 3705 digital output module,
on the STB DDI 36150 digital input mod- 245
ule, 97 STB XTS 2100 spring clamp field wiring con-
on the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod- nector
ule, 155 on the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod-
on the STB DDO 3230 digital out put mod- ule, 189
ule, 170 on the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod-
on the STB DDO 3410 digital output mod- ule, 205
ule, 189 on the STB DDI 3230 digital input module,
on the STB DDO 3415 digital output mod- 45
ule, 205 on the STB DDI 3420 digital input module,
on the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod- 58
on the STB DDI 3425 digital input module,

418 31007720 08/2016

 Index

72 245
on the STB DDI 36100 digital input mod- on the STB DDI 3725 digital input module,
ule, 84 108
on the STB DDI 36150 digital input mod-
ule, 97
on the STB DDO 3200 digital output mod- U
ule, 155 user-configurable parameters
on the STB DDO 3230 digital out put mod- STB DAI 5230 digital input module, 123
ule, 170 STB DAI 5260 digital input module, 134
on the STB DDO 3600 digital output mod- STB DAI 7220 digital input module, 145
ule, 217 STB DAO 5260 digital output module, 260
on the STB DDO 3605 digital output mod- STB DAO 8210 digital output module, 276
ule, 233 STB DDI 3230 digital input module, 47
STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring con- STB DDI 3420 digital input module, 60
nector STB DDI 3610 digital input module, 86
on the STB DAI 7220 digital input mod- STB DDO 3200 digital output module, 157
ule, 143 STB DDO 3230 digital output module, 174
on the STB DAI 5230 digital input module, STB DDO 3410 digital output module, 191
121 STB DDO 3600 digital output module, 219
on the STB DAI 5260 digital input module, STB DDO 3605 digital output module, 235
132 STB DDO 3705 digital output module, 249
on the STB DAO 5260 digital output mod- STB DRA 3290 relay output module, 310
ule, 258 STB DRC 3210 relay output module, 294
on the STB DAO 8210 digital output mod-
ule, 273
STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring con-
nector
on the STB DRA 3290 relay module, 307
STB XTS 2110 spring clamp field wiring con-
nector
on the STB DRC 3210 relay module, 291
STB XTS 2130 spring clamp power wiring
connector
on the STB PDT 2100 power distribution
module, 326
on the STB PDT 2105 power distribution
module, 337
on the STB PDT 3100 power distribution
module, 347
on the STB PDT 3105 power distribution
module, 359
STB XTS 2180 spring clamp field wiring con-
nector
on STB DDO 3705 digital output module,

31007720 08/2016 419

Index

420 31007720 08/2016